2002 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety.................................................................................................................ii
Your Car at a Glance ...........................................................................................................................2
Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5
Proper use and care of your car's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls.................................................................................................................57
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features ..............................................................................................101
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving..................................................................................................................................153
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new car, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving ..............................................................................................................................................167
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance.....................................................................................................................................193
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer.
Appearance Care..............................................................................................................................253
Tips on cleaning and protecting your car. Things to look for if your car ever needs body repairs.
Taking Care of the Unexpected......................................................................................................261
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information.....................................................................................................................287
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada)................................................................301
A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)......................................................................................................306
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index...................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
This Owner’s Manual should be considered a
permanent part of the vehicle, and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and without
incurring any obligation whatsoever.
This Owner’s Manual covers all models of
the Acura RSX. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Owner’s Identification
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votreconcessionnairede
commander le numéro de pièce
33S6MC00
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
Main Menu
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your Acura, other
property, or the environment.
Several warranties protect your new Acura. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Acura is to read
this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your car so you
can refer to it at any time.
Maintaining your car according to the schedules given in this manual helps
to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. When
your car needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Acura dealer’s staff is
specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Acura. Your
Acura dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer
any questions and concerns.
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2002 Acura RSX was a wise investment.
It will give you years of driving pleasure.
Introduction
WARNING:
i
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
These signal words mean:
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
car safely is an important
responsibility.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your car. You must use
your own good judgement.
on the car.
how to use this car correctly and safely.
AFewWordsAboutSafety
Safety Section
Safety Headings
Safety Messages
Safety Labels
Instructions
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
ii
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Main Menu
Your Car at a Glance
2
PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWW
SSWWIITTCCHHEESS
AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM
SSHHIIFFTT LLEEVVEERR
HHEEAATTIINNGG//CCOOOOLLIINNGG
CCOONNTTRROOLLSS
((PP.. 7799))
((PP.. 9911))
((PP.. 110022))
((PP.. 112255))
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLIIGGHHTTSS
GGAAUUGGEESS
((PP.. 5599))
((PP.. 6666))
((PP.. 117722,, 117755))
HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE
((PP.. 115577))
PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE
MMIIRRRROORR CCOONNTTRROOLLSS
((PP.. 115566))
FFUUEELL FFIILLLL
DDOOOORR RREELLEEAASSEE
DDOOOORR AANNDD
HHAATTCCHH LLOOCCKK SSWWIITTCCHH
((PP.. 9944))
((PP.. 9955))
Main Menu
Your Car at a Glance
3
HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS
((PP.. 7733))
((PP.. 7733))
((PP.. 6699//7700))
TTIILLTT AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT
((PP.. 7744))
HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG LLIIGGHHTTSS
RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR
MMOOOONNRROOOOFF
CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL
IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL
BBRRIIGGHHTTNNEESSSS
WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD WWIIPPEERRSS//
WWAASSHHEERRSS
((PP.. 7700//7711))
((PP.. 7700))
HHOORRNN
((PP.. 114499))
((PP.. 9933))
Main Menu
4
Main Menu
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts
properly. It explains your Supple-
mental Restraint System. And it tells
you how to properly restrain infants
andchildreninyourcar.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.............Your Car’s Safety Features . 7
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
.........................................Airbags . 10
.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11
..........................Head Restraints . 11
..................................Door Locks . 11
........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12
............................Protecting Adults . 13
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14
4. Fasten and Position the Seat
.....................................Belts . 16
....5. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 17
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 18
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
........................Protecting Children . 21
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 21
Children Should Sit in the Back
...........................................Seat . 22
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Poses Serious Risks to
...............................Children . 22
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 24
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 24
...Additional Safety Precautions . 25
General Guidelines for Using
...............................Child Seats . 26
.......................Protecting Infants . 30
.........Protecting Small Children . 34
.......Protecting Larger Children . 37
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 41
.............................Using LATCH . 42
Additional Information About Your
.................................Seat Belts . 44
..Seat Belt System Components . 44
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 44
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 45
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 46
Additional Information About
...........................Your Airbags . 48
........................SRS Components . 48
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 48
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 50
How the SRS Indicator Light
.......................................Works . 51
How the Side Airbag Cut-off
...........Indicator Light Works . 52
.............................Airbag Service . 53
...Additional Safety Precautions . 53
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54
...................................Safety Labels . 55
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
Main Menu
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed the greater the
risk, but serious accidents can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual. (See page
.)
Children are safest when they are
properly restrained in the back seat,
notthefrontseat.Achildwhoistoo
smallforaseatbeltmustbeproperly
restrained in a child safety seat. (See
page .)
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance. (See page .)
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags
supplement seat belts, but airbags
are designed to inflate only in a
moderate to severe frontal collision.
So even though your car is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and
your passengers always wear your
seat belts, and wear them properly.
(See page .)
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
16
21
196
13
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed
Restrain All Children
Keep Your Car in Safe Condition
Don’t Drink and Drive
6
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your car is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
Some safety features do not require
anyactiononyourpart.These
include a strong steel framework
that forms a safety cage around the
passenger compartment; front and
rear crush zones that are designed to
crumple and absorb energy during a
crash; a collapsible steering column;
and seat belt tensioners that
automatically tighten the front seat
belts in the event of a crash.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Car’s Safety Features
7
((44))
((22))
((88))
((99))
((22))
((1100))
((77))
((55))
((11)) ((33)) ((66))
((77))
((11)) SSaaffeettyy CCaaggee
((22)) CCrruusshh ZZoonnee
((33)) SSeeaattss && SSeeaatt--BBaacckkss
((44)) HHeeaadd RReessttrraaiinnttss
((55)) CCoollllaappssiibbllee SStteeeerriinngg CCoolluummnn
((66)) SSeeaatt BBeellttss
((77)) FFrroonntt AAiirrbbaaggss
((88)) SSiiddee AAiirrbbaaggss
((99)) SSeeaatt BBeelltt TTeennssiioonneerrss
((1100)) DDoooorr LLoocckkss
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Foryoursafety,andthesafetyof
your passengers, your car is
equipped with seat belts in all seating
positions.
These safety features are designed
to reduce the severity of injuries in a
crash. However, you and your
passengers can’t take full advantage
of these safety features unless you
remain sitting in a proper position
and
In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
Your seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your seat
belts.
Seat belts are the single most
effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your car has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Car’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
always wear your seat belts
properly.
Why Wear Seat Belts
8
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
car’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag, and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Always wear
your seat belt, and make sure you
wear it properly.
What you should do:
Your Car’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
if you have airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your car has a Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision.
Your car also has side airbags to help
protect the upper torso of the driver
or a front seat passenger during a
moderate to severe side impact.
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force and
speed. So while airbags help save
lives, they can cause minor injuries,
or more serious or even fatal
injuries if occupants are not
properly restrained or sitting
properly.
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard.
Airbags
Your Car’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, rollovers, or minor
frontal or side collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
What you should do:
10
Main Menu
Table of Contents
How you adjust your seats and seat-
backs can also affect your safety. For
example, sitting too close to the
steering wheel or dashboard
increases the risk of you or your
passenger being injured by striking
theinsideofthecar,orbyan
inflating airbag.
Reclining a seat-back too far reduces
the seat belt’s effectiveness and
increases the chance that the seat’s
occupant will slide under the seat
belt in a crash and be seriously
injured.
Your car’s seats are designed to keep
you in a comfortable, upright
position so you can take full
advantage of the protection offered
by seat belts and the energy
absorbing materials in the seats.
Move the front
seats as far back as possible, and
keep adjustable seat-backs in an
upright position whenever the car is
moving.
Keeping your doors locked reduces
thechanceofbeingthrownoutof
the car during a crash. It also helps
prevent occupants from accidentally
opening a door and falling out, and
outsiders from unexpectedly opening
your doors.Head restraints can help protect you
from whiplash and other injuries.
Seats & Seat-Backs Door Locks
Head Restraints
What you should do:
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Car’s Safety Features
11
Main Menu
Table of Contents
All adults, and children who have
outgrown child safety seats, are
wearing their seat belts and
wearingthemproperly(seepage
).
Any infant or small child is
properly restrained in a child seat
inthebackseat(seepage ).
To make sure you and your
passengers get the maximum
protection from your car’s safety
features, check the following each
time before you drive away:
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in severe
crashes, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Seat-backs are upright (see page
).
Frontseatoccupantsaresitting
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel and
dashboard (see page ).
All cargo is properly stored or
secured (see page ).
Both doors are closed and locked
(see page ).
16
21
13
14
13
164
Pre-Drive Safety Checklist
Your Car’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
12
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver and other adult
occupants.
These instructions also apply to
children who have outgrown child
seats and are large enough to wear
lap/shoulder belts. (See page for
important additional guidelines on
how to properly protect larger
children.)
Any driver who sits too close to the
steering wheel is at risk of being
seriously injured or killed by striking
the steering wheel or from being
struck by an inflating front airbag
during a crash.
After everyone has entered the car,
be sure the doors are closed and
locked.
For safety, locking the doors reduces
the chance that a passenger,
especially a child, will open a door
while the car is moving and
accidentally fall out. It also reduces
the chance of someone being thrown
out of the car during a crash.
For security, locked doors can
prevent an outsider from
unexpectedly opening a door when
you come to a stop.
See page for how to lock the
doors.
37
79
CONTINUED
Introduction Adjust the Front SeatsClose and Lock the Doors1. 2.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To reduce the chance of injury, wear
your seat belt properly, sit upright
with your back against the seat and
movetheseatawayfromthe
steering wheel to the farthest
distance that allows you to maintain
full control of the car.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
adjust the seat so the center of the
chest is at least 10 inches away from
the center of the steering wheel.
Also make sure your front seat
passenger moves the seat as far to
the rear as possible.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel. If you
sit too close to the steering wheel,
you could be injured if the front
airbag inflates.
Most shorter drivers can get far
enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the pedals.
However, if you are concerned about
sitting too close, we recommend that
you investigate whether some type
of adaptive equipment may help.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
See page for how to adjust the
front seats.
86
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
14
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for how to adjust seat-
backs.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
A front passenger should also adjust
the seat-back to an upright position,
but as far from the dashboard as
possible. A passenger who sits too
close to the dashboard could be
injured if the front airbag inflates.
86
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position and sit well
back in the seat.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Also check
that the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack from the
shoulder part, then check that the
belt rests across the center of your
chest and over your shoulder. This
spreads the forces of a crash over
the strongest bones in your upper
body.
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
4.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
16
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,
so that the wheel points toward your
chest, not toward your face.
Pointing the steering wheel toward
your chest provides optimal
protection from the airbag.
See page for how to adjust the
steering wheel.
See page for additional
information about your seat belt
system and how to take care of your
belts.
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
as it should, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
Anyone using a seat belt that is
not working properly can be
seriously injured or killed. Have your
Acura dealer check the belt as soon
as possible.
44
74
Adjust the Steering Wheel5.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
No one should
sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt.
17
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
car is parked and the engine is off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured by
striking interior parts of the car, or
by being struck by an inflating front
airbag. Being struck by an inflating
side airbag can result in possibly
serious injuries.
Remember, to get the best
protection from your car’s airbags
and other safety features, you must
sit properly and wear your seat belt
properly.
Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
6.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
18
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Because protecting the mother is the
best way to protect her unborn child,
a pregnant woman should always
wear a seat belt whenever she drives
or rides in a vehicle.
Remember to keep the lap portion of
the belt as low as possible across
your hips.
Pregnant women should also sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard. This will reduce the risk
of injuries to both the mother and
her unborn child that can be caused
by a crash or an inflating airbag.
Each time you have a check-up, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
If they do, they
couldbeveryseriouslyinjuredina
crash.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
severely compromise the
protective capability of the seat
belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
CONTINUED
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
Advice for Pregnant Women Additional Safety Precautions
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
19
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Any object
attached to or placed on the covers
marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in the
center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard could
interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the car and hurt
someone.
If a side airbag
inflates,acupholderorotherhard
object attached on or near the
door could be propelled inside the
car and hurt someone.
If your
hands or arms are close to the
airbag cover in the center of the
steering wheel or on top of the
dashboard, they could be injured if
the front airbags inflate.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a front door.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
20
Main Menu
Table of Contents
(See page
.)
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be restrained
whenever they ride in a vehicle.
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of death of children ages 12 and
under.
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many parents and other
adults may not know how to
protect young passengers.
So if you have children, or if you ever
need to drive with a grandchild or
otherchildreninyourcar,besureto
read this section.
(See page
.)
26
37
properly
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
All Children Must Be Restrained
Anychildwhoistoosmalltoweara
seat belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat.
A larger child should always be
restrained with a seat belt.
21
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it inflates with tremendous
speed.
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in the
back seat, not the front seat. The
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in the back seat.
In the back seat, children are less
likely to be injured by striking hard
interior parts during a collision or
hard braking. Also, children cannot
be injured by an inflating airbag
when they ride in the back.
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward into the
dashboard and crush the child.
Ifyouarewearingaseatbelt,the
child can be torn from your arms
during a crash. For example, if
your car crashes into a parked
vehicleat30mph(48km/h),a
20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a
600-lb (275 kg) force, and you will
not be able to hold on.
During a
crash, the belt could press deep
into the child and cause very
serious injuries.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Poses Serious Risks to Children
Children Should Sit in the Back
Seat
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.
Additional Precautions to Parents
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and an infant or child.
22
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in the back seat, your car has
warninglabelsonthedashboardand
on the driver’s and front passenger’s
visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, properly restrained with a seat
belt. (See page for important
information about protecting larger
children.)
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
37
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
U.S. ModelsSmall Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Larger Children
23
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards from
the passenger’s front airbag, and
paying close attention to a child
distracts the driver from the
important tasks of driving, placing
both of you at risk.
If a child requires physical attention
or frequent visual contact, we
strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in the back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear a seat belt
properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
To remind you of the front airbag
hazards, your car has warning labels
on the driver’s and front passenger’s
visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Your car has two seating positions in
the back seat where children can be
properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry more than
twochildreninyourcar:
37
13
18
16
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Canadian Models
24
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous. For
example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. And
children left alone with the key in
the ignition can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Children who play in cars can
accidentally get trapped inside the
car. Teach your children not to
play in or around cars.
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition,
and open the hatch, which can
lead to accidental injury or death.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not leave children alone in your
vehicle.
Lock both doors and the hatch
when your vehicle is not in use.
Keep car keys and remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
25
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The following pages give general
guidelines for selecting and installing
child seats for infants and small
children.
Childrenuptoaboutone
year old should be restrained in a
rear-facing, reclining child seat. Only
a rear-facing seat provides the
proper support to protect an infant’s
head, neck, and back. See page
for additional information on
protecting infants.
To provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
The child seat should
meet Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)
or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 (CMVSS 213). Look
for the manufacturer’s statement
of compliance on the box and seat.
30
General Guidelines for Using
Child Seats
Infants:
Selecting a Child Seat
The child seat should meet safety
standards.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
2.
1.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
26
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before purchasing a child seat, we
recommend that parents test the
child seat in the specific vehicle
seating position (or positions) where
they intend to use the seat. If a
previously purchased child seat does
not fit, you may need to buy a
different one that will fit.
Due to variations in the design of
child seats, vehicle seats, and seat
belts, all child seats will not fit all
vehicle seating positions.
A child who is too
large for a rear-facing child seat, and
who can sit up without support,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing child seat. See page for
additional information on protecting
small children.
However, Acura is confident that one
or more child seat models can fit and
be properly installed in all
recommended seating positions in
your car.
Your car has lower anchorages
installed for use with LATCH-
compatible child seats. For more
information, see page .
34
42
CONTINUED
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Small Children:
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Never in the front seat, due
to the front airbag hazard.
The passenger’s front airbag
inflates with enough force to kill
or seriously injure an infant in a
rear-facing child seat.
A small child in a forward-facing
child seat is also at risk. If the
vehicle seat is too far forward,
or the child’s head is thrown
forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can kill or
seriously injure the child.
If a small child must ride in the
front, follow the instructions
provided in this section.
Not recommended,
due to the front airbag hazard. If a
small child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position and secure a front-
facing child seat with the seat belt
(see page ).
Recommended positions.
Properlysecurearear-facingchild
seat (see page ).
Recommended
positions. Properly secure a front-
facing child seat (see page ).
This page briefly summarizes Acura’s
recommendations on where to place
rear-facing and forward-facing child
seats in your car.
35
31
35
Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s Seat
Infants:
Back Seats
Small children:
Infants:
Small children:
Airbags Pose Serious
Risks to Children
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
28
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After selecting a proper child seat,
and a good position to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
canbethrownoutoftheseatina
crash and be seriously injured.
To provide security during normal
driving maneuvers as well as during
a collision, we recommend that
parents secure a child seat as firmly
as possible.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured
in the desired seating position.
When you are not using a child seat,
either remove it and store it in a safe
place, or make sure it is properly
secured. An unsecured child seat can
be thrown around the car during a
crash or sudden stop and injure
someone.
However, a child seat does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehicles
or seating positions, it may be
difficult to install a child seat so that
it does not move at all. Some side-to-
side or back-and-forth movement can
be expected and should not reduce
the child seat’s effectiveness.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.
All child seats are
designed to be secured to the car
with the lap part of a lap/shoulder
belt. Some child seats can be
secured to the vehicle’s LATCH
anchorage system instead. A child
whose seat is not properly secured
to the car can be endangered in a
crash. See pages , and for
instructions on how to properly
secure child seats in this car.
423531
Installing a Child Seat Secure the child in the child seat.
Storing a Child Seat
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
Properly secure the child seat to
the car.
1.
2.
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back. Infants up to about
one year of age must be restrained in
a rear-facing child seat.
In this car, a rear-facing child seat
canbeplacedinanyseatingposition
in the back seat, but not in the front
seat.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
We recommend that an infant be
restrained in a rear-facing child seat
until the infant reaches the seat
maker’s weight or height limit and is
able to sit up without support.
If the passenger’s
front airbag inflates, it can hit the
back of the child seat with enough
forcetokillorseriouslyinjurean
infant. If an infant must be closely
watched, we recommend that
another adult sit in the back seat
with the baby.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat.
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
30
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
With the child seat in the desired
back seating position, route the
belt through the child seat
according to the seat maker’s
instructions, then insert the latch
plate into the buckle.
The lap/shoulder belts in the back
seats have a locking mechanism that
must be activated to secure a child
seat.
The following pages provide
instructions and tips on how to
secure a rear-facing child seat with
this type of seat belt.
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front-seat passenger from
moving the seat as far back as
recommended (see page ). Or it
may prevent them from locking the
seat-back in the desired upright
position (see page ).
In either case, we recommend that
you place the child seat directly
behind the front passenger seat,
move the front seat as far forward as
needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or
you may wish to get a smaller child
seat that allows you to safely carry a
front passenger.
If you have a child seat designed to
attach to the vehicle’s LATCH
anchorage system, follow the
instructions on page .
1.
14
13
42
CONTINUED
Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pushandpullthechildseat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat, while
pulling up on the belt.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
4. 5.2.
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
32
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To deactivate the locking
mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
To achieve the desired reclining
angle, it may help to put a rolled up
towel under the toe of the child seat,
as shown.
Forproperprotection,aninfantmust
ride in a reclined, or semi-reclined
position. To determine the proper
reclining angle, check with the baby’s
doctor or follow the seat maker’s
recommendations.
Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation
Tips
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A child who can sit up without
support, and who fits within the child
seat maker’s weight and height
limits, should be restrained in a
forward-facing, upright child seat.
In this car, the best place to install a
forward-facing child seat is in one of
the seating positions in the back seat.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to cause
very serious or fatal injuries. If a
small child must be closely watched,
we recommend that another adult sit
in the back seat with the child.
We also recommend that a small
child stay in the child seat as long as
possible, until the child reaches the
weight or height limit for the seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Child Seat Placement
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
34
Main Menu
Table of Contents
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
The lap/shoulder belts in the back
and front passenger seating positions
have a locking mechanism that must
be activated to secure a child seat.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to secure a
forward-facing child seat with this
type of seat belt.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the car, and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
If you have a child seat designed to
attach to the vehicle’s LATCH
anchorage system, follow the
instructions on page .
1.
42
CONTINUED
Child Seat Installation
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
Improperly placing a forward-
facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury
or death if the front airbags
inflate.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible and properly restrain
the child.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pushandpullthechildseat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure. It
mayhelptoputweightonthe
child seat, or push on the back of
the seat, while pulling up on the
belt.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
4. 5.2.
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
36
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in the back seat and
wear a lap/shoulder belt.
If a child is too short for the shoulder
part of the belt to properly fit, we
recommend that the child use a
booster seat until the child is tall
enough to use the seat belt without a
booster.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in the front seat.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism in order to remove a
child seat, unlatch the buckle,
unroute the seat belt, and let the belt
fully retract.
Protecting Larger Children
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
Allowing a larger child to sit
improperly in the front seat can
result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must sit in front,
make sure the child moves the
seat as far back as possible
and wears the seat belt properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt, severely
compromise the protective capability
of the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
If they do, they could
be very seriously injured in a crash.
However, if the belt touches or
crosses the child’s neck, the child
needs to use a booster seat.
This could result in
serious neck injuries during a crash.
This could cause
very serious injuries during a crash.
It also increases the chance that the
child will slide under the belt in a
crash and be injured.To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt. Follow the
instructions on page . Then check
how the belt fits.
If the shoulder part of the belt rests
over the child’s collarbone and
against the center of the chest, as
shown, the child is large enough to
wear the seat belt.
16
Do not put any accessories on a seat
belt.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back or
under the arm.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
38
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The back seat is the safest place for
a child of any age or size.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
In addition, the passenger’s front
airbag poses serious risks to children.
If the seat is too far forward, or the
child’s head is thrown forward
during a collision, or the child is
unrestrained or out of position, an
inflating front airbag can kill or
seriously injure the child.
Thesideairbagalsoposesrisks.If
any part of a larger child’s body is in
the path of a deploying airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of the ears are
even with the top of the seat-back. A
child of this height should be tall
enough to use the lap/shoulder belt
without a booster.
If a child needs a booster seat, we
recommend choosing a style that
allows the child to use the lap/
shoulder belt directly, without a
shield, as shown.
Whichever style you select, follow
the booster seat maker’s instructions.
CONTINUED
When Can a Larger Child Sit in FrontUsing a Booster Seat
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly positioned and secured.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in the
front, there are other important
factors you should consider.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit over the hips, chest, and
shoulder (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
the child should not sit in the front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
16 38
Physical Size
Maturity
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
40
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Since a tether can provide additional
security, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
To use the anchorage point, pivot its
cover down.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchorage point and tighten
the strap according to the child seat
maker’s instructions.
Remove the cargo area cover when
you use a tether. See Cargo Area
Cover on page .
Your Acura has two tether
anchorage points on the rear panel
for securing a tether-style child seat
to the car.
89
Using Child Seats with Tethers
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
AANNCCHHOORRAAGGEE PPOOIINNTT
CCOOVVEERR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your car is equipped with LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) at the rear seats. The
lower anchors are located between
the seat-back and seat bottom and
aretobeusedonlywithachildseat
designed for use with LATCH.
The exact location of each lower
anchor is marked with a small circle
above the lower anchor point.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
Move the seat belt buckle or seat
belt tongue away from the lower
anchors.
Make sure there are no foreign
objects around the anchors.
Foreign objects could get in the
way of a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
Put the child seat in the rear left
or right vehicle seat and attach the
child seat to the lower anchors
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Using LATCH
42
LLOOWWEERR AANNCCHHOORRAAGGEESS
RRiiggiidd ttyyppee
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Follow the child seat maker’s
instructions for any additional
advice on adjusting or tightening
the fit.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchorage point and tighten
the strap according to the child
seat maker’s instructions.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers.
4. 5.
6.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
FFlleexxiibbllee ttyyppee
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This seat belt has a single belt that
goes over your shoulder, across your
chest and across your hips.
The seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not
fastened before the ignition is turned
ON (II), the light will come on and a
beeper will also sound. The beeper
will stop after a few seconds, but the
light will stay on until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened.
The seat belts in all seating positions
except the driver’s have an additional
locking mechanism that must be
activated to secure a child seat. (See
pages and for instructions on
how to secure child seats with this
type of seat belt.)
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
Guide the belt across your body to
the door pillar. After exiting the car,
be sure the belt is out of the way and
will not get closed in the door.
To unlock the belt, push the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched.
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all four seating
positions.
31 35
Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
44
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the locking
mechanism will activate. The belt
will retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
let the seat belt fully retract. To
refasten the belt, pull it out only as
far as needed.
See page for instructions on how
to wear the lap/shoulder belt
properly.
The tensioners are designed to
activate primarily in frontal collisions.
The tensioners are independent of
the airbag system, so they can be
activated during a collision that
might not cause the airbags to
deploy. In this case, the airbags
would not be needed but the
additional seat belt tension can be
helpful.
The tensioners will be activated in a
collision severe enough to cause the
front airbags to inflate.
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.
16
CONTINUED
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
Main Menu
Table of Contents
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
that the lap/shoulder belts retract
easily. Any belt not in good condition
or not working properly will not
provide good protection and should
be replaced as soon as possible.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled in the normal
way.
The SRS indicator light will
come on if there is a
problem with your automatic seat
belt tensioners (see page ).
Acura provides a lifetime warranty
on seat belts. Acura will repair or
replace any seat belt component that
fails to function properly during
normal use. Please see your
booklet for
details.
51
Acura
Warranty Information
Seat Belt Maintenance
U.S. Models
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
46
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed.
Automatic seat belt tensioners that
deployed during a crash must be
replaced.
For information on how to clean your
seat belts, see page .257
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) includes:
Two front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG.’’
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, the sensors
will detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration. If the rate of
deceleration is high enough, the
control unit will instantly inflate the
front airbags.
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, and driver and
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition is ON (II).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe frontal
collision.
Automatic seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
An indicator light on the
instrument panel that alerts you to
a possible problem with the
system (see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your car’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
45
51
SRS Components How Your Front Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
48
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This can occur when the severity of
a collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
Since both airbags use the same
sensors, both airbags normally
inflate at the same time. However, it
is possible for only one airbag to
inflate.
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
During a frontal crash, your seat
belts help restrain your lower body
and torso. Your airbag provides a
cushion to help restrain and protect
your head and chest.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is approximately one-tenth
of a second, so fast that most
occupants are not aware that the
airbags deployed until they see them
lying in their laps.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
may experience some temporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the car as soon as it is safe to do so.
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, the sensors will
detect rapid deceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
U.S. Owners:
For additional information on how
your airbags work, see the booklet
titled
that came with your
owner’s manual.
Canadian Owners:
For additional information on how
your airbags work, ask your dealer
for a copy of the booklet titled
Your car is equipped with side
airbags for the driver and a front
seat passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the front
seat-backs, and both are marked
‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’
SRS: What You Need to Know
About Airbags
SRS:
What You Need to Know About Airbags
.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
How Your Side Airbags Work
50
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the light comes on at any other
time, or does not come on at all, you
should have the system checked by
your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator light does not
come on after you turn the ignition
ON (II).
If the light stays on after the
engine starts.
If the light comes on or flashes on
andoffwhileyoudrive.
The SRS indicator light
alerts you to a potential
problem with your front airbags and
automatic seat belt tensioners.
When you turn the ignition ON (II),
this indicator will light briefly then
go out. This tells you that the system
is working properly.
This light will also alert you to a
potential problem with your side
airbags or passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system (see page
).
If you see any of these indications,
your front or side airbags may not
deploy, your passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system may not
work properly, or your seat belt
tensioners may not work when you
need them. See your Acura dealer as
soon as possible.
52
How the SRS Indicator Light
Works
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
Ignoring the SRS indicator light
can result in serious injury or
death if the airbags, cutoff
system, or tensioners do not
work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
theSRSlightalertsyoutoa
potential problem.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
When you turn the ignition ON (II),
the indicator should light briefly and
goout(seepage ).Ifitdoesn’t
light, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.
If a small-statured adult leans
sideways, or larger adult slouches
and leans sideways into the
deployment path of the side airbag,
the system may also shut off the side
airbag.
If the side airbag indicator light
comes on, you should have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the deployment
path of the side airbag, the system
will turn the airbag back on and the
light will go out.
This light alerts you that
the passenger’s side airbag
has been automatically shut off.
Although Acura does not encourage
children to ride in the front seat, this
system is designed to shut off the
side airbag if a child leans sideways
and the child’s head is in the side
airbag deployment path.
It does not mean there is a problem
with your side airbags. It means that
thesideairbagcutoffsystemhas
activated to prevent the side airbag
from deploying.
To reduce the risk of injury from an
inflating side airbag, your car has an
automatic cutoff system for the
passenger’s side airbag.
60
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
How the Side Airbag Cut-off
Indicator Light Works
52
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
See page for further information
and precautions relating to your
airbags.
If rain or spilled water
soaks into a seat-back, it can
prevent the side airbag system
from working properly.
Your front and side airbag systems
are virtually maintenance-free, and
there are no parts you can safely
service. However, you must have
your car serviced if:
Take your car to an
authorized Acura dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, the airbags might not
inflate when you need them.
Improperly
replacing or covering front seat-
back covers can prevent your side
airbags from inflating during a
collision.
Any
airbag that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit, automatic seat belt
tensioners and other related parts.
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by an Acura dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.
162
Airbag Service Additional Safety Precautions
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Do not expose the front seat-backs
to water.
The SRS indicator light alerts you
to a problem.
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting an
Acura dealer.
Your airbags ever inflate.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
53
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push the button.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
Your car’s exhaust contains carbon
monoxide gas. You should have no
problem with carbon monoxide
entering the car in normal driving if
you maintain your car properly.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The car is raised for an oil change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
Thecarwasinanaccidentthat
may have damaged the underside.
If you must sit in your parked car,
even in an unconfined area, with the
engine running, adjust the heating
and cooling system as follows:
With the hatch open, air flow can
pull exhaust gas into your car’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
hatch open, open all the windows
and set the heating and cooling
system as shown below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Driver and Passenger Safety
54
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read, contact your Acura dealer
for a replacement.
CONTINUED
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models only
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
55
RADIATOR CAP
SUN VISORDASHBOARD
HOOD
Main Menu
Table of Contents
56
Main Menu
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your Acura. All the essential controls
are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 58
...............................Indicator Lights . 59
Maintenance Required
...................................Indicator . 64
.........Security System Indicator . 65
.............................................Gauges . 66
...............................Speedometer . 66
.................................Tachometer . 66
.....................................Odometer . 66
...................................Trip Meter . 67
..................................Fuel Gauge . 67
...................Temperature Gauge . 67
Controls Near the Steering
.......................................Wheel . 68
...................................Headlights . 69
............Daytime Running Lights . 69
....Instrument Panel Brightness . 70
................................Turn Signals . 70
.....................Windshield Wipers . 71
..................Windshield Washers . 72
Rear Window Wiper and
.....................................Washer . 72
..........................Hazard Warning . 73
.............Rear Window Defogger . 73
......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 74
...............................Keys and Locks . 75
..............................................Keys . 75
....................Immobilizer System . 76
............................Ignition Switch . 77
..................................Door Locks . 79
.........Power Door/Hatch Locks . 80
............................................Hatch . 80
...................Remote Transmitter . 81
....................................Glove Box . 84
............................Seat Adjustments . 85
.............Front Seat Adjustments . 85
Driver’s Seat Height
..............................Adjustment . 86
...........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 86
........................Rear Seat Access . 86
...........................Folding Rear Seat . 87
....................................Seat Heaters . 88
...........................Cargo Area Cover . 89
..............................Power Windows . 90
.........................................Moonroof . 93
.............................................Mirrors . 94
....Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 94
.................................Parking Brake . 95
..................................Vanity Mirror . 96
........................................Coat Hook . 96
.............................Beverage Holder . 97
...................Console Compartment . 98
...............Accessory Power Socket . 99
.................................Interior Lights . 99
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
57
Main Menu
Control Locations
Instruments and Controls
58
PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWW
SSWWIITTCCHHEESS
AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM
SSHHIIFFTT LLEEVVEERR
((PP.. 8800))
((PP.. 9911))
FFUUEELL FFIILLLL
DDOOOORR RREELLEEAASSEE
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLIIGGHHTTSS
GGAAUUGGEESS
MMIIRRRROORR CCOONNTTRROOLLSS
HHEEAATTIINNGG//CCOOOOLLIINNGG
CCOONNTTRROOLLSS
((PP.. 115511))
((PP.. 6666))
((PP.. 5599))
((PP.. 110022))
((PP.. 112255))
((PP.. 117722,, 117755))
((PP.. 115577))
HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE
((PP.. 9944))
((PP.. 9955))
DDOOOORR AANNDD
HHAATTCCHH LLOOCCKK SSWWIITTCCHH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊＊
＊＊
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
59
AANNTTII--LLOOCCKK BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR ((PP..6611))
IIMMMMOOBBIILLIIZZEERR SSYYSSTTEEMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR ((PP..6633))
CCHHRRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR ((PP..6611))
DDOOOORR--OOPPEENN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR ((PP..6622))
SSEEAATT BBEELLTT RREEMMIINNDDEERR LLIIGGHHTT
((PP..6600))
MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE RREEQQUUIIRREEDD
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR ((PP..6644))
SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR ((PP..6600))
HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR ((PP..6622))
CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR ((PP..6622))
LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR ((PP..6611))
MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP ((PP..6611)) LLOOWW FFUUEELL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR ((PP..6622))
PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE AANNDD BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR ((PP..6611))
TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL AANNDD HHAAZZAARRDD
WWAARRNNIINNGG IINNDDIICCAATTOORR ((PP..6622))
SSEECCUURRIITTYY SSYYSSTTEEMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR ((PP..6655))
SSIIDDEE AAIIRRBBAAGG CCUUTT--OOFFFF IINNDDIICCAATTOORR ((PP..6600))
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your car.
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). It is a
reminder to you and your passengers
to protect yourselves by fastening
the seat belts. A beeper also sounds
if you have not fastened your seat
belt.
If you do not fasten your seat belt,
the beeper will stop after a few
seconds but the light stays on until
you do. Both the light and the beeper
stay off if you fasten your seat belt
before turning on the ignition.
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags. This light will
also alert you to a potential problem
with your side airbags, passenger’s
side airbag automatic cutoff system
or automatic seat belt tensioners.
For complete information, see page
.
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
For complete information, see page
.
51
52
Instruments and Controls
Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Light
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Side Airbag Cut-off
Indicator
60
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This light has two functions:
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch ON (II). It
is a reminder to check the parking
brake. Driving with the parking
brake not fully released can
damage the brakes and tires.
If the indicator remains lit after
you have fully released the
parking brake while the engine is
running, or if it comes on while
driving, it can indicate a problem
in the brake system. For complete
information, see page .
If this light comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For complete
information, see page .
The engine can be severely damaged
if this light flashes or stays on when
the engine is running. For complete
information, see page .
See page .
This light normally comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II), and when
the ignition switch is turned to
START (III).
If this light comes on at any other
time, there is a problem in the ABS.
If this happens, take the car to your
dealer to have it checked. With the
light on, your car still has normal
braking ability but no anti-lock. For
complete information, see page .
1.
2.
278
183
275
274
276
Only on models equipped with ABS (see
page )181
Instruments and Controls
Indicator Lights
Parking Brake
and Brake
System
Indicator
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
61
U.S. CanadaU.S. Canada
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The left or right turn signal light
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If the light does not blink or
blinks rapidly, it usually means one
of the turn signal bulbs is burned out
(see page ). Replace the bulb as
soon as possible, since other drivers
cannot see that you are signalling.
WhenyouturnontheHazard
Warning switch, both turn signal
lights blink. All turn signals on the
outside of the car should flash.
This lights when you set the cruise
control. See page for information
on operating the cruise control.
This light comes on if either door is
not closed tightly.
This light comes on as a reminder
that you must refuel soon.
This light comes on with the high
beam headlights. See page for
information on the headlight
controls.
246
69
149
Only on models equipped with Cruise
Control System
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Cruise Control Indicator
Door-open Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
High Beam Indicator
62
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch ON (II). It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly-coded
ignition key. If it is not a properly-
coded key, the indicator will blink
and the engine will not start (see
page ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0).
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) with
the headlight switch off and the
parking brake set. It should go off if
youturnontheheadlightsorrelease
the parking brake. If it comes on at
any other time, it means there is a
problem with the DRL. There may
also be a problem with the high
beam headlights.
This light comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this light come on
(see page ).
76
216
Canadian models only
Canadian models only
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Washer Level Indicator‘‘Daytime Running
Lights’’ Indicator
63
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your car in for
scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules
for Normal and Severe Driving
Conditions on pages .
For the first 8,000 miles (12,800 km)
after the Maintenance Required
Indicator is reset, it will come on for
two seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II).
Between 8,000 miles (12,800 km)
and 10,000 miles (16,000 km) this
indicator will light for two seconds
when you first turn the ignition
switch ON (II), and then flash for
ten seconds.
If you exceed 10,000 miles (16,000
km) without having the scheduled
maintenance performed, this
indicator will remain on as a constant
reminder.
198 202
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Maintenance Required Indicator
64
MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE RREEQQUUIIRREEDD IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your dealer will reset this indicator
after completing the scheduled
maintenance. If this maintenance is
done by someone other than your
Acura dealer, reset the indicator as
follows.
Turn off the engine.
Press and hold the select/reset
button in the instrument panel,
then turn the ignition switch ON
(II).
Hold the button until the indicator
resets (approximately ten
seconds).
This indicator lights when the
security system is set. See page
for complete information on the
security system.
1.
2.
3.
148
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Security System Indicator
65
SSEELLEECCTT//RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONN
SSEECCUURRIITTYY SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This shows your speed in miles per
hour (mph). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h).
This shows your speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in miles per
hour (mph).
The tachometer shows the engine
speed in revolutions per minute
(rpm). To protect the engine from
damage, never drive with the
tachometer needle in the red zone.
The odometer shows the total dis-
tance your car has been driven. It
measures miles in U.S. models and
kilometers in Canadian models.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the
odometer with the intent to change
the number of miles or kilometers
indicated.
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
Speedometer
Odometer
Tachometer
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
66
TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE GGAAUUGGEE TTAACCHHOOMMEETTEERR SSPPEEEEDDOOMMEETTEERR FFUUEELL GGAAUUGGEE
SSEELLEECCTT//RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONN
OODDOOMMEETTEERR//TTRRIIPP MMEETTEERR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom white mark to about
the middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to near
the upper white mark. If it reaches
the red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the
side of the road. Turn to page for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system.
This shows how much fuel you have.
It is most accurate when the car is on
level ground. It may show slightly
more or less than the actual amount
whenyouaredrivingoncurvyor
hilly roads.
The needle returns to the bottom
after you turn off the ignition. The
gauge shows the fuel level reading
immediately after you turn the
ignition switch back ON (II).
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the Select/Reset
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0’’.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays and the odometer by
pressing the Select/Reset button
repeatedly. Each trip meter works
independently, so you can keep track
of two different distances. 212
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
Temperature GaugeFuel GaugeTrip Meter
67
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Thetwoleversonthesteering
column contain controls for driving
features you use most often. The left
lever controls the turn signals,
headlights, and high beams. The
right lever controls the windshield
washers and wipers.
The controls on the dashboard to the
right of the steering column are for
the instrument panel brightness,
hazard warning lights and rear
window defogger.
The moonroof switch and cruise
control switch are to the left of the
steering column.
The tilt adjustment lever on the
underside of the steering column
allows you to tilt the steering wheel.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
68
RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW
DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR
HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//
TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS
TTIILLTT AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT
HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG LLIIGGHHTTSS
CCRRUUIISSEE
CCOONNTTRROOLL
MMOOOONNRROOOOFF
HHOORRNN
WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD
WWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS
IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL
BBRRIIGGHHTTNNEESSSS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal lever back lightly, then
release it. The high beams will come
on and go off.
The high beams will stay on for as
long as you hold the lever back, no
matter what position the headlight
switch is in.
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) and
release the parking brake. They
remain on until you turn the ignition
off, even if you set the parking brake.To change between low beams and
high beams, pull the turn signal lever
until you hear a click, then let go.
The blue high beam indicator will
light (see page ).
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
The rotating switch on the left lever
controls the lights. Turning this
switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns
on the parking lights, taillights,
instrument panel lights, side-marker
lights, and rear license plate lights.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights.
If you leave the lights on with the
ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)
or LOCK (0), you will hear a
reminder beeper when you open the
driver’s door.
62
Headlights
Daytime Running Lights
(Canadian Models)
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
69
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To signal a lane change, push lightly
on the turn signal lever in the proper
direction and hold it. The lever will
return to the center position as soon
as you release it.
Signal a turn or lane change with this
lever. Push down on the lever to
signal a left turn, and up to signal a
right turn. If you push it up or down
all the way, the turn signal continues
to blink even when you release the
lever. It shuts off automatically as
you complete the turn.
The knob on the instrument panel
controls the brightness of the instru-
ment panel lights. Turn the knob to
adjust the brightness.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Turn Signals
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
70
TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLEEVVEERR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This lever controls the windshield
wipers and washers. It has five
positions;
MIST: mist
OFF: off
INT: intermittent
LO: low speed
HI: high speed
To select a position, push the lever
up or down.
In intermittent, the wipers operate
every few seconds. The sweep
interval will change slightly with
speed; getting shorter as you drive
faster. In low speed and high speed,
the wipers run continuously.
You can vary how often the wipers
sweep the windshield by turning the
INT TIME ring next to the rotary
switch.
If you turn the INT TIME ring to the
shortest delay, the wipers will
change from intermittent to low
speed operation when vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
CONTINUED
Windshield Wipers
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
71
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To operate the wipers in mist mode,
push the control lever up from the
OFF position. The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
This gives you a quick way to clear
the windshield.
To clean the windshield, pull back on
the wiper control lever. The washers
spray until you release the lever.
To turn on the rear window wiper,
turn the rotary switch clockwise to
ON. To also use the rear window
washer, turn the rotary switch
clockwise past ON. The washer will
spray as long as you hold the rotary
switch in this position. If you turn the
rotary switch counterclockwise from
the OFF position, the washer will
spray without activating the rear
window wiper.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Windshield Washers Rear Window Wiper and Washer
72
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The light in the
button lights to show the defogger is
on. If you do not turn it off, the
defogger will shut itself off after
about25minutes.Italsoshutsoff
when you turn off the ignition. You
have to turn it on again when you
restart the car.
Pushtheredbuttontoturnonthe
hazard warning lights (four-way
flashers). This causes all four
outside turn signals and both
indicators in the instrument panel to
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous
area near heavy traffic, or if your car
is disabled.
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
Thedefoggerwiresontheinsideof
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side to side.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Hazard Warning Rear Window Defogger
73
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for important safety
information about how to properly
position the steering wheel.
17
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
To adjust the steering wheel upward
or downward:
Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
Move the steering wheel to the
desired position, making sure the
wheel points toward your chest,
not toward your face. Make sure
you can see the instrument panel
gauges and the indicator lights.
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in that position.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up and down.
1.
3.
4.
2.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment
74
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
car and be seriously injured in a
crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the car is stopped.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Your car comes with two master
keys and a valet key.
The valet key works only in the
ignition and the door locks. You can
keepthegloveboxlockedwhenyou
leave your car and the valet key at a
parking facility.
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number plate with your set of keys.
You will need this number if you
ever have to get a lost key replaced.
Keep the plate stored in a safe place.
When replacing keys, use only
Acura-approved key blanks.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
Immobilizer System. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them immedi-
ately with a soft cloth.
The keys do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.
The master key fits all the locks on
your car:
• Ignition
• Doors
•Glovebox
Keys
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
75
KKEEYY
NNUUMMBBEERR
PPLLAATTEE
VVAALLEETT KKEEYY
((GGRREEYY))
MMAASSTTEERR KKEEYY
((BBLLAACCKK))
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Immobilizer System protects
your car from theft. A properly-
coded master or valet key must be
used in the ignition switch for the
engine to start. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used,
the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the Immobilizer System
indicator should come on for a few
seconds, then go out. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0), remove the key, reinsert
it, and turn the switch to ON (II)
again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object is near the
ignition switch when you insert the
key. To make sure the system
recognizes the key code:
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your Acura dealer.
Do not keep other immobilizer
keys on the same key ring.
Use a plastic or leather key fob,
not metal.
Keep other keys away from your
car’s key and the ignition switch
while trying to start the engine.
Your car also comes with two remote
transmitters; see page for an
explanation of the operation.
82
Instruments and Controls
Immobilizer System
Keys and Locks
Remote Transmitter
76
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
The ignition switch is on the right
side of the steering column. It has
four positions:
•LOCK(0)
• ACCESSORY (I)
• ON (II)
• START (III)
This indicator will also blink several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0).
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your car undriveable.
If you have lost your key and you
cannot start the engine, contact your
Acura dealer.
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Ignition Switch
77
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may sometimes make
it difficult to turn the key from
LOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turn
the steering wheel to the left or to
the right as you turn the key.
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To switch from ACCESSORY to
LOCK, you must push the key in
slightly as you turn it. If your car has
an automatic transmission, the shift
lever must also be in Park. The anti-
theft lock will lock the steering
column when you remove the key.
This is the normal key
position when driving. All features
and accessories on the car are usable.
Several of the lights on the instru-
ment panel come on as a test when
you turn the ignition switch from
ACCESSORY to ON.
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to ON (II) when you let go of
the key.
The engine will not start if the
Immobilizer System does not
recognize the key’s coding (see page
).
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
thedriver’sdoor.Removethekeyto
turn off the beeper.
In this position,
you can operate the audio system
and the accessory power socket.
76
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
LOCK (0)
ON (II)
START (III)
ACCESSORY (I)
78
Removing the key from the
ignition switch while driving
locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control.
Remove the key from the
ignition switch only when
parked.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Each door has a lock tab at the top of
the door. When you push down the
lock tab on the driver’s door, both
doors and the hatch lock. Pulling up
the lock tab on the driver’s door only
unlocks that door. The lock tab on
the passenger’s door only locks and
unlocks that door.
To lock the passenger’s door when
getting out of the car, push the lock
tab down and close the door. To lock
the driver’s door, pull the inside or
outside door handle and push the
lock tab down. Release the handle,
then close the door.
Both doors and the hatch can be
locked from the outside by using the
key in either door.
To unlock only the driver’s door
from the outside, insert the key in
the driver’s door lock, turn the key
and release it. If you turn the key
and hold it, both doors and the hatch
will unlock. Both doors and the
hatch will unlock when you unlock
the passenger’s door with the key.
Door Locks
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
79
LLOOCCKK TTAABB
KKEEYY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Each door has a master door and
hatch lock switch. Either switch
locks and unlocks both doors and the
hatch. Push the switch down to lock
both doors and the hatch. Push up to
unlock them.
To close the hatch, press down on
the back edge.
See page for cargo loading and
weight limit information. Keep the
hatch closed at all times while
driving to avoid damaging the hatch
and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See
on page .
To open the hatch, pull the handle,
then lift up the hatch.
The hatch will not lock or unlock
when the battery is disconnected.
164
54
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Power Door/Hatch Locks Hatch
Carbon
Monoxide Hazard
80
MMAASSTTEERR DDOOOORR AANNDD HHAATTCCHH
LLOOCCKK SSWWIITTCCHH
PPuullll
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can lock and unlock your car
with the remote transmitter. When
you push the LOCK button, both
doors and the hatch lock.
When you push the UNLOCK button
once, only the driver’s door unlocks.
The passenger’s door and the hatch
unlock when you push the button a
second time. The parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights and license
plate light flash twice.
If you unlock the doors and the
hatch with the remote transmitter,
but do not open either door or the
hatch within 30 seconds, the doors
and the hatch automatically relock
and the security system sets.
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the center position) will
come on when you press the
UNLOCK button. If you do not open
either door or the hatch, the light
will go out in about 30 seconds and
the doors and the hatch will
automatically relock. If you relock
the doors and the hatch with the
remote transmitter before 30
seconds have elapsed, the light will
go off immediately.
You cannot lock the doors and the
hatch with the remote transmitter if
any door or the hatch is not fully
closed. You cannot lock or unlock
the doors and the hatch with the key
in the ignition switch.
CONTINUED
Remote Transmitter
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
81
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Panic mode allows you to remotely
activate your vehicle’s horn and
lights to attract attention. When
activated, the horn will sound, and
the headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights and
instrument panel lights will flash for
about 30 seconds. To activate panic
mode,pressandholdthePANIC
button for about one second.
To cancel Panic mode before 30
seconds, press any button on the
remote transmitter. You can also
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Panic mode will not activate if the
key is in the ON (II) position.
When the remote transmitter’s
battery begins to get weak, it may
take several pushes on the button to
lock or unlock the doors and the
tailgate, and the LED will get dim.
Replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Battery type: CR2025
To replace the battery, place a cloth
on the edge of the transmitter and
remove the upper half by carefully
prying on the edge with a small flat-
tip screwdriver.
Panic Mode Replacing the Battery
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
82
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
Remove the old battery and note the
polarity. Make sure the polarity of
the new battery is the same ( side
facing up), then insert it in the
transmitter.
Snapthetwohalvesofthe
transmitter case back together.
Avoid severe shock to the trans-
mitter, such as dropping or throwing
it. Also, protect it from extreme hot
or cold temperatures.
Clean the transmitter case with a
soft cloth. Do not use strong
cleaners or solvents that could harm
the case. Immersing the transmitter
in any liquid will harm the trans-
mitter and cause it to not function
properly.
If you lose a transmitter, you will
need to have the replacement
programmed to your vehicle’s
system by your Acura dealer. Any
other transmitters you have will also
need to be reprogrammed.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
CONTINUED
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Transmitter Care
83
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the glove box by pulling the
bottom of the handle. Close it with a
firm push. Lock or unlock the glove
box with the master key.
The glove box light comes on only
when the instrument panel lights are
on.
U.S.:
Canada:
All models
Premium and Type-S models
only
Glove Box
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
84
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
To change the angle of the seat-back,
pull up on the lever on the outside of
the seat bottom. Move the seat-back
to the desired position and release
the lever. Let the seat-back latch in
the new position.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
To adjust the seat forward and
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position and
releasethebar.Trytomovetheseat
to make sure it is locked in position.
See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
13 14
CONTINUED
FrontSeatAdjustments
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
85
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To get into the back seat on the
driver’s side, pull up on the seat-back
adjustment lever.
Vary the lumbar support by moving
the lever on the right side of the
seat-back.
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. Turn the dial on the
outside of the seat cushion to change
the height of the seat bottom.
U.S.:
Canada:
All models U.S.:
Canada:
All models
Premium and Type-S models
only
Premium and Type-S models
only
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Driver’s Lumbar Support Rear Seat Access
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
86
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The back of the rear seat folds down
to give you more cargo space. Each
side folds down separately. With only
half the seat folded, you can still
carry a passenger in the back seat.
To unlatch either side of the seat-
back, pull up on the release tab.
Move the seat belt out of the way
and fold the seat-back down.
To lock the seat-back upright, push
the seat-back firmly against its latch.
Tug on the seat-back to make sure it
is latched.
Do not put any heavy items on the
seat-back when it is folded.
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard. See
on page .
To get into the rear seat on the
passenger’s side, push down on the
release lever at the base of the seat-
back. The seat-back will tilt forward
and the entire seat will move forward
to allow easier entry to the back seat.
After you return the seat-back to the
upright position, push the whole seat
backwards until it latches. Make
sure the seat is fully latched before
sitting in it.
164
Folding Rear Seat
Carrying Cargo
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
87
RREELLEEAASSEE LLEEVVEERR
RREELLEEAASSEE TTAABB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
On Canadian models
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The ignition switch
must be ON (II) to use them. Push
the heater switch to turn the power
on or off. The pilot lamp lights and
remains on while the heaters are on.
Do not use the seat heaters when the
engine is off or when idling for a
long period of time. They can drain
the battery, making your car hard to
start.
Seat Heaters
Instruments and Controls
88
SSEEAATT HHEEAATTEERR SSWWIITTCCHH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The cargo area cover may be re-
moved to give you more cargo room.
Open the hatch.
Push up on the sides of the cargo
area cover to release the cover
from the hooks.
Pull down on the cover to remove
the mounting pins from the holes
in the hatch lining.
1.
2. 3.
CONTINUED
Cargo Area Cover
Instruments and Controls
89
MMOOUUNNTTIINNGG PPIINNHHOOOOKK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Reverse this procedure to install the
cargo area cover.
Thereisareferencelineonthe
cargo area side panel. To avoid
damaging the cargo cover, remove it
if the cargo goes above that line.
Do not place items on the cargo area
cover, or stack objects higher than
the top of the back seat. They could
block your view and be thrown about
the vehicle during a crash or sudden
stop.
Your car’s windows are electrically-
powered. Turn the ignition switch to
ON(II)toraiseorloweranywindow.
Each door has a switch that controls
its window. To open the window,
push the switch down and hold it.
Release the switch when you want
the window to stop. Close the
window by pulling back on the
switch and holding it.
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
Cargo Area Cover, Power Windows
90
RREEFFEERREENNCCEE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The driver’s armrest has a master
power window control panel. To
open the passenger’s window, push
down on the switch and hold it until
the window reaches the desired
position. To close the window, pull
back on the window switch. Release
the switch when the window gets to
the position you want.
The master control panel also con-
tains these extra features:
To open the driver’s
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down, then release it.
The window automatically goes
down all the way. To stop the
window from going all the way down,
pull back on the window switch
briefly.
To close the driver’s window fully,
pull back the window switch firmly,
then release it. The window
automatically goes all the way up. To
stop the window from going all the
way up, push down on the window
switch briefly.
CONTINUED
AUTO
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
91
MMAAIINN SSWWIITTCCHH
DDRRIIVVEERR’’SS WWIINNDDOOWW SSWWIITTCCHH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To open or close the driver’s window
partially, push down or pull back on
the window switch lightly and hold it.
The window will stop when you
release the switch.
If the driver’s window runs into any
obstacle while it is closing
automatically, it will stop, and then
reverse direction. To close the
window, remove the obstacle, then
use the window switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
The MAIN switch controls power to
the passengers’window. With this
switch off, the passengers’window
cannot be raised or lowered. The
MAIN switch does not affect the driv-
er’s window. Keep the MAIN switch
offwhenyouhavechildreninthecar
so they do not injure themselves by
operating the window unintentionally.
The lights inside the switches come
onwhenyouturntheparkinglights
or headlights on.
If your car’s battery is disconnected
or goes dead, or the driver’s window
fuse is removed, the AUTO function
will be disabled. The power window
system needs to be reset after
reconnecting the battery or installing
the fuse. You should do the following.
Start the engine. Push down on
the driver’s window switch until
the window is fully open.
Pull back on the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for a second or two more.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
car checked by an Acura dealer.
1.
2.
Auto Reverse
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
92
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Usetheswitchonthedashboardto
open and close the moonroof. The
ignition switch must be ON (II).
Pushandholdthe switchto
open the moonroof. Release the
switch when the moonroof reaches
the desired position. To close the
moonroof, press and hold the
switch.
U.S.:
Canada:
All models
Premium and Type-S models
only
Instruments and Controls
Moonroof
93
Closing the moonroof on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure passengers are
clear of the moonroof before
closing it.
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or motor.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
Adjust the outside mirrors with the
adjustment switch on the left side of
the dashboard:
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirrorright,left,up,ordown.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns off the
adjustment switch so you can’t
move a mirror out of position by
accidentally bumping the switch.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
94
TTAABB
AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT SSWWIITTCCHHSSEELLEECCTTOORR SSWWIITTCCHH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake light on
the instrument panel should go out
when the parking brake is fully
released (see page ).
The outside mirrors are heated to re-
move fog and frost. With the ignition
switchON(II),turnontheheaters
by pressing the button. The light in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.
61
Canada: Premium and Type-S models
only
Parking Brake
Instruments and Controls
Mirrors, Parking Brake
95
PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE LLEEVVEERRHHEEAATTEEDD MMIIRRRROORR BBUUTTTTOONN
Driving the car with the parking brake
applied can damage the rear brakes
and axles.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Touseavanitymirroronthebackof
the sun visor, pull up the cover.
To use this coat hook, rotate the
hook down. Close it with a firm push.
Vanity Mirror, Coat Hook
Vanity Mirror Coat Hook
Instruments and Controls
96
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holder. A spilled liquid that
is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can also
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.
To open the beverage holder, push
the left knob and slide the cover
forward.
The beverage holders for the rear
seat passenger’s are located in the
armrests.
CONTINUED
Beverage Holder
Instruments and Controls
97
PPuusshh
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To open the console compartment,
push the right knob and slide the
cover forward.
Another beverage holder is located
in the center console behind the
parking brake lever.
Beverage Holder, Console Compartment
Instruments and Controls
Console Compartment
98
PPuusshh
Main Menu
Table of Contents
They will not power an automotive
type cigarette lighter element.
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
To power an accessory, the ignition
switch must be in ACCESSORY (I)
or ON (II).
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch. In the OFF position, the light
does not come on. In the center
position, the ceiling light comes on
when you open either door. After the
doors are closed tightly, the light
dims slightly, then fades out in about
30 seconds. In the ON position, the
ceiling light stays on continuously.
There are two accessory power
sockets, one is located in the front of
the center console. The other is
located at the rear of the console. To
use either power socket, pull up the
cover.
U.S. :
Canada :
Standard on all models
Rear power socket optional
Instruments and Controls
Accessory Power Socket, Interior Lights
AccessoryPowerSocket InteriorLights
Ceiling Light
99
DDOOOORR AACCTTIIVVAATTEEDD
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The cargo area light comes on when
you open the hatch.
Turn on the spotlight by pushing the
button next to each light. Push the
button again to turn it off. You can
use the spotlights at all times.
U.S.:
Canada:
All models
Premium and Type-S models
only
Instruments and Controls
Interior Lights
Spotlights Cargo Area Light
100
Main Menu
Table of Contents
.....................Heating and Cooling . 102
...............Temperature Sensors . 108
Audio System (All models
......................except Type-S) . 109
....AM/FM/CD Audio System . 109
.................Operating the Radio . 109
.................Adjusting the Sound . 113
..............................Digital Clock . 114
............Audio System Lighting . 115
.........Operating the CD Player . 115
.....Operating the CD Changer . 117
....CD Player Error Indications . 119
CD Changer Error
.............................Indications . 120
Operating the Cassette
.....................................Player . 121
............Tape Search Functions . 123
.................Caring for Cassettes . 124
................Audio System (Type S) . 125
AM/FM/Cassette/
.CD Changer Audio System . 125
.................Operating the Radio . 126
.................Adjusting the Sound . 129
..............................Digital Clock . 130
............Audio System Lighting . 131
....................Radio Frequencies . 131
........................Radio Reception . 131
Operating the Cassette
.....................................Player . 133
............Tape Search Functions . 134
Caring for the Cassette
.....................................Player . 137
Loading CDs in the
.................................Changer . 139
...................................Operation . 141
Removing CDs from the
.................................Changer . 143
.......Protecting Compact Discs . 145
CD Changer Error
.............................Indications . 146
.......................Theft Protection . 147
............................Security System . 148
...............................Cruise Control . 149
Comfort and Convenience Features
Comfort and Convenience Features
101
Main Menu
The engine must be running for the
heater and air conditioning to
generate hot and cold air. The heater
uses engine coolant to warm the air.
If the engine is cold, it will be several
minutes before you feel warm air
coming from the system.
The heating and cooling system
draws air through the exterior vents
at the bottom of the windshield.
Keep these vents clear of leaves and
other debris.
The direction of air flow from the
vents in the center and each side of
the dashboard is adjustable.
Open each vent by pushing on the
recess. Adjust the direction of air
flow by rotating the vent.
The heating and cooling system in
your Acura has full heating,
ventilation, and air conditioning
capabilities. In combination with the
air conditioning, the system
maintains the interior temperature
you select. The system also adjusts
the fan speed and air flow direction
automatically depending on the set
temperature.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
102
CCEENNTTRREE VVEENNTTSS SSIIDDEE VVEENNTTSS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your car has a flow-through venti-
lation system. Air enters the car
through vents in front of the wind-
screen. It circulates through the
interior then exits through vents
near the tailgate. This system pro-
vides fresh air even when the car is
standing still. To bring in outside air,
select the Fresh Air mode. Set the
fan at a comfortable speed.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Ventilation
Heating and Cooling
103
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To use the heating and cooling
system in automatic mode, set the
system as follows.
Set the fan control dial to AUTO.
Set the mode control dial to AUTO.
Turn the temperature control dial
to the desired temperature.
Select Fresh Air mode by pressing
the Recirculation button. The
indicator in the switch should be
off.
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button.
TurningthefancontroldialtoOFF
shuts the heating and cooling system
completely off. Keep the system
completely off only for short periods.
To keep stale air and mustiness from
collecting, you should have the fan
running at all times.
To heat or cool the interior faster,
select Recirculation mode and set
the temperature control dial to the
upper or lower limit.
The system runs of full cooling or
heating only. It does not regulate the
interior temperature. When the
temperature is set between the lower
and upper limits, the system
regulates the interior temperature to
the set value.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Heating and Cooling
Automatic Operation
Comfort and Convenience Features
104
FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL
MMOODDEE CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL
TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL
RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG BBUUTTTTOONN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the dial below
the outside air temperature.
With A/C on, use the temperature
control dial to adjust the temperature
of the air flow to a comfortable
setting.
Air conditioning also removes mois-
ture from the air as it operates. You
can use it to defog the windows
quickly in cool or damp weather.
Used in combination with the heater,
it also makes the interior warm and
dry.
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
) when using the A/C in heavy
traffic or driving up long hills. If it
moves near the red zone, turn off the
air conditioning until the gauge
reads normally.
You can manually set the system
controls for ventilation, air condi-
tioning, heating, air flow direction,
and fan speed in various combination.
Pressing the A/C button turns the
air conditioning ON and OFF. The
indicator in the button lights when
the A/C is ON.
67
Comfort and Convenience Features
Manual Operation
Heating and Cooling
Air Conditioning Button
105
AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG BBUUTTTTOONN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This button controls the source of air
going into the system. When the
indicator in this button is lit, the
system is recirculating the interior
air (Recirculation mode). When the
indicator is off, fresh air is brought
in from outside the vehicle (Fresh
Air mode). Push the button to
change between recirculated and
fresh air.
Use Recirculation mode to heat or
cool the interior more quickly, or to
keep out smoke and dust. Leaving
the system in the Recirculation mode
with the A/C off can cause the
windows to fog up. Switch to Fresh
Air mode as soon as the interior
reaches a comfortable temperature
or the outside smoky, dusty condi-
tion clears.
You can manually select the fan
speed by turning the fan speed
control dial. Turning this dial
clockwise increases the fan speed,
which increases air flow.
Some air will come out of the side
vents in all modes.
Use this dial to select the direction of
air flow coming out of the system.
When the dial is set to AUTO, the
system controls the fan speed
automatically.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
Recirculation Button
Fan Speed Mode Control Dial
106
RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN
FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL MMOODDEE CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
The main air flow comes out
of the dashboard vents.
The main air flow is directed
to the floor vents.
In AUTO mode, the system controls
the air flow direction automatically
between the dashboard vents and
the floor vents.
The main air flow is divided
between the floor vents and
defroster vents at the base of the
windshield.
The main air flow is directed
to the windshield for faster defrost-
ing or defogging. To defrost or defog
more quickly, turn the temperature
control dial to maximum. Select
and set the fan speed to high.
If there is actual frost on the win-
dows, first select the Recirculation
mode. If the windows are fogged,
select the Fresh Air mode. Warmed
air will then flow from the wind-
shield and side defroster vents.
When you select or ,
the A/C turns on automatically to
help dehumidify the air and defog
the windshield. When you select
another mode, the A/C stays on. If
you do not want to use the A/C in
that mode, press the button to turn it
off.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
107
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Theheatingandcoolingsystemhas
temperature sensors located next to
the steering column and in the top of
the dashboard. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
Temperature Sensors
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
108
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is broad-
castinginstereo.Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pushing the PWR/
VOL knob. Adjust the volume by
turning the same knob.
Your Acura’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The anti-theft feature will disable the
system if it is disconnected from the
vehicle’s battery. To get the system
working again, you must enter a
code number (see page ).147
All models except Type-S
Audio System
AM/FM/CD Audio System
Operating the Radio
Comfort and Convenience Features
109
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−−
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob clockwise to tune to a
higher frequency, or
counterclockwise to tune to a lower
frequency.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
SELECT, and the Preset buttons.
To change the frequency rapidly,
press and hold the top or bottom of
theSEEKbar.Releasethebarwhen
the display reaches the desired
frequency. Depending on which part
of the bar you press, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency.
The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
and release the top or bottom of the
SEEK bar. Depending on which part
of the bar you press, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal.
The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. The system will scan
up the band for a station with a
strong signal. When it finds one, it
will stop and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
TUNE
SEEK SCAN
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
110
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Pick the Preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each Preset
button.
To store a frequency:
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
preset button to tune to it.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your car’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Preset
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
111
AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
SSTTEERREEOO IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
SSCCAANN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS
AAUUTTOO
SSEELLEECCTT
BBUUTTTTOONN
SSCCAANN
BBUUTTTTOONN
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB
TTUUNNEE//MMOODDEE KKNNOOBB
SSEEEEKK//SSKKIIPP BBAARR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’
displayed when you press any preset
button that does not have a station
stored.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset buttons. You
can then use the preset buttons to
select those stations.
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset
buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find the desired
frequencies, then store them in the
selected preset buttons as described
previously.
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you preset pre-
viously. When you return home, turn
off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
will then select the frequencies you
originally set.
AUTO SELECT
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
112
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are
each adjustable. You select which of
these you want to adjust by pressing
the TUNE knob. The mode changes
fromBAStoTREtoFADtoBAL,
and then back to the selected audio
mode, each time you press the
TUNE knob.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
Select BAL or FAD by pressing the
TUNE knob. Adjust the Balance or
Fader to your liking by turning the
TUNE knob. The level number on
the display shows you the range.
Use these modes to
adjust the tone to your liking. Select
TRE or BAS by pressing the TUNE
knob. Adjust the desired mode by
turning the TUNE knob. The level
number on the display shows you the
range.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode with the
TUNE knob.
For information, See page .131
Adjusting the Sound
Balance/Fader
Treble/Bass
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
113
LLEEVVEELL NNUUMMBBEERR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
TTUUNNEE//MMOODDEE KKNNOOBB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To set the hours, press and hold the
CLOCK button. Press and hold the
H button until the numbers advance
to the desired time.
To set the minutes, press and hold
the CLOCK button. Press and hold
the M button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.
YoucanusetheRESbuttonto
quickly set the time to the nearest
hour. Press the RES button while
pressing the CLOCK button. If the
displayed time is before the half
hour, pressing RES sets the clock
back to the previous hour. If the
displayed time is after the half hour,
pressing RES sets the clock forward
to the beginning of the next hour.
1:06 would RESET to 1:00
1:52 would RESET to 2:00
If your car’s battery is disconnected
or goes dead, the time setting will be
lost. To set the time again, follow the
setting procedure.
The audio system usually shows the
time when the ignition switch is in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). It
shows the operation mode of the
radio, CD player, or optional CD
changer when you operate them,
then goes back to the time display
after three seconds.
For example :
Digital Clock
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
114
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You operate the CD player with the
same controls used for the radio.
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control dial to adjust the il-
lumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
With the ignition switch in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insert
the disc into the CD slot. Push the
disc in halfway, the drive will pull it
in the rest of the way and begin to
play. The number of the track that is
playing is shown in the display.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring. Play
only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
When the system reaches the end of
the disc, it will return to the begin-
ning and play that disc again.
70
Operating the CD Player
Audio System Lighting
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
115
CCDD SSLLOOTTAAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB
CCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
RRAANNDDOOMM BBUUTTTTOONN
RRAANNDDOOMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN
EEJJEECCTT
BBUUTTTTOONN
SSEEEEKK//SSKKIIPP BBAARR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
You can switch to the radio while a
CD is playing by pressing the AM/
FM button. Press the CD button to
return to playing the CD. The CD
will begin playing where it left off.
You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar
while a disc is playing to select
passages and change tracks.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdtheSEEK/SKIPbar.Press
the side to move forward. You
will see CUE in the display. Press the
side to move backward. You
will see REW displayed. Release the
bar when the system reaches the
point you want.
Each time you press and release the
side of the SEEK/SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
the sidetoskipbackwardtothe
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to skip to the beginning of
the previous track.
Press the eject button to remove the
disc from the drive.
If you eject the disc, but do not
remove it from the slot, the system
will automatically reload the disc
after 15 seconds and put the CD
player in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
116
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
＋−
＋
−
To activate the Repeat
feature, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current track. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks on
the CD in random order, rather than
in the order they are recorded on the
CD. To activate Random Play, press
the RDM button. You will see RDM
in the display. The system will then
select and play tracks randomly.
This continues until you deactivate
RandomPlaybypressingtheRDM
button again.
A Compact Disc changer is available
foryourcar.Itholdsuptosixdiscs,
providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the in-dash
CD player.
Load the desired CDs in the
magazine and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
Play only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed.
To select a different disc, press the
DISC (Preset 6) or DISC
(Preset5)button.Thenextdiscin
the changer is loaded and played
when you press the DISC button.
DISC loads and plays the previous
disc. If you select an empty slot in
the magazine, the changer will, after
finding that slot empty, try to load
the CD in the next slot. This
continues until it finds a CD to load
and play.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
REPEAT
RANDOM PLAY
Operating the CD Changer
(Optional)
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
117
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When you switch back to CD mode,
the system selects the same unit (in-
dash or changer) that was playing
when you switched out of CD mode.
To use the SKIP, REPEAT, and
RANDOM functions, refer to the in-
dash player operating instructions.
If you load a CD in the in-dash player
while the changer is playing a CD,
the system will stop the changer and
begin playing the in-dash CD. To
select the changer again, press the
CD button. Play will begin where it
left off. Use the CD button to switch
between the player and the changer.
If you eject the in-dash CD while it is
playing, the system will automatically
switch to the CD changer and begin
play where it left off. If there are no
CDs in the changer, the display will
flash. You will have to select another
mode (AM or FM) with the FM or
AM button.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.145
Protecting Compact Discs
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
118
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indication Cause
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
player,findthecauseinthechartto
the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the car to your
Acura dealer.
Solution
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
High temperature.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your Acura dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
CD Player Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
119
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indication Cause
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the car to your
Acura dealer.
Solution
FOCUS Error
No CD in the CD
magazine
Mechanical Error
High temperature.
No CD magazine in the
CD changer.
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Acura dealer.
Insert CD.
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Acura dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Insert CD magazine.
CD Changer Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
120
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The cassette system features Dolby
noise reduction, automatic sensing of
chromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, and
auto-reverse for continuous play.
Make sure the tape opening on the
cassette is facing to the right, then
insert the cassette most of the way
into the slot. The system will pull it
in the rest of the way, and begin to
play.
2
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Operating the Cassette Player
(Optional)
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
121
NNRR BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN
FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN
AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
CCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN
PPLLAAYY//PPRROOGG BBUUTTTTOONN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The indicates
thesideyouinsertedfacingupward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the PROG
button.
If you turn the system off while a
tape is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition, the cassette will remain in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the cassette player will be in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the PLAY button.
Dolby noise reduction turns on when
you insert a cassette. If the tape was
not recorded with Dolby noise
reduction, turn it off by pressing the
NR button.
Noise reduction remains off until you
turn it on by pressing the button
again.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the EJECT
button on the cassette player.
To switch to the radio or CD player
while a tape is playing, press the
AM/FM, or CD button. To change
back to the cassette player, press the
CD button.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
122
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−Fast Forward and Re-
wind move the tape rapidly. To re-
wind the tape, push the REW button.
You will see REW in the display. To
fast forward the tape, push the FF
button. You will see FF displayed.
Press the PLAY button to take the
system out of rewind or fast forward.
If the system reaches the end of the
tape while in fast forward or rewind,
it automatically stops that function,
reverses direction, and begins to play.
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
The Skip function allows
you to find the beginning of a song
or passage. To activate SKIP, press
the SEEK/SKIP bar. Press the
side to advance to the
beginning of the next song or
passage, or the side to return to
the beginning of the current song or
passage. FF or REW will flash in the
display as the tape moves. When the
system reaches the beginning of the
next song or passage (FF), or the
beginning of the current one (REW),
it goes back to PLAY mode.
FF/REWTape Search Functions SKIP
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
123
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the
button again.
The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
Damaged cassettes can jam inside
the drive or cause other problems.
See page for information on
cassette care and protection.
137
REPEAT Caring for Cassettes
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
124
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The anti-theft feature will disable the
system if it is disconnected from the
car’s battery. To get the system
working again, you must enter a
code number (see page ).
Your Acura’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The cassette system features Dolby
noise reduction, automatic sensing of
chromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, and
auto-reverse for continuous play.
The in-dash CD changer holds up to
six discs. You operate the CD
changer with the same controls used
for the radio. See page for CD
changer operation.
139
147
2
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Type-S
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AM/FM/Cassette/CD Changer
Audio System
125
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
○○
−
−＋
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the TUNE knob to the right to
tune to a higher frequency, or to the
left to tune to a lower frequency.
Turn the knob right or left until the
display reaches the desired
frequency.
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pressing the PWR/
VOL knob or the AM or FM button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is broad-
castinginstereo.Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
You can use any of four methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or the
Preset buttons.
The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
either SEEK button ( or ), then
release it. Depending on which
SEEK button you press, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal.
The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. When the system is
in the SCAN mode, SCAN shows in
the display. The system will scan up
the band for a station with a strong
signal. When it finds one, it will stop
and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
TUNE
Operating the Radio
SEEK
SCAN
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
126
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your car’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
Preset button to tune to it.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Pick the Preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
Use the TUNE or SEEK function
to tune the radio to a desired
station.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each Preset
button.
To store a frequency:
You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Preset
127
PPWWRR//VVOOLL
KKNNOOBB
FFMM
BBUUTTTTOONN
SSEEEEKK
BBUUTTTTOONNSS
AAMM
BBUUTTTTOONN
SSTTEERREEOO IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB
SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN
PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’
displayed when you press any preset
button that does not have a station
stored.
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset
buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find the desired
frequencies, then store them in the
selected preset buttons as described
previously.
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you preset pre-
viously. When you return home, turn
off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
will then select the frequencies you
originally set.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset buttons. You
can then use the preset buttons to
select those stations.
AUTO SELECT
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System
128
AA..SSEELL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
AA..SSEELL
BBUUTTTTOONN
SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN
SSEEEEKK
BBUUTTTTOONNSS
PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are
each adjustable. You select which of
these you want to adjust by pressing
the TUNE knob. The mode changes
fromBAStoTREtoFADtoBAL,
and then back to the selected audio
mode, each time you press the
TUNE knob.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode with the
TUNE knob.
Use these modes to
adjust the tone to your liking. Select
TRE or BAS by pressing the TUNE
knob. Adjust the desired mode by
turning the TUNE knob.
The displayed number shows you
the current setting.
When the adjustment level reaches
the center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
Select BAL or FAD by pressing the
TUNE knob. Adjust the Balance or
Fader to your liking by turning the
TUNE knob.
The displayed number shows you
the current setting.
When the adjustment level reaches
the center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Adjusting the Sound
Treble/Bass
Balance/Fader
129
LLEEVVEELL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The audio system display usually
shows the time when the ignition
switch is in ACCESSORY (I) or ON
(II). It shows the operation mode of
the radio, cassette player, or CD
changer when you operate them,
then goes back to the time display
after five seconds.
To set the hours, press and hold the
CLOCK button. Press and hold the
H (preset 4) button until the
numbers advance to the desired time. You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, pressing and
holding the clock button, then
pressing the RESET button (preset
6) sets the clock back to the previous
hour. If the displayed time is after
the half hour, the clock is set
forward to the beginning of the next
hour.
If your car’s battery is disconnected
or goes dead, the time setting will be
lost. To set the time again, follow the
setting procedure.
For example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:52 will reset to 2:00To set the minutes, press and hold
the CLOCK button. Press and hold
the M (preset 5) button until the
numbers advance to the desired time.
Digital Clock
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
130
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control dial to adjust the il-
lumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band:
530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band:
87.7 to 107.9 megahertz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least ten
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).
Stations on the FM band are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
Your Honda’s radio can receive the
complete AM and FM bands.
How well your Acura’s radio receives
stations is dependent on many
factors, such as the distance from
the station’s transmitter, nearby
large objects, and atmospheric
conditions.
70
Audio System Lighting
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
131
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
132
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
Make sure the tape opening on the
cassette is facing to the right, then
insert the cassette most of the way
into the slot. The system will pull it
in the rest of the way, and begin to
play.
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The indicates
thesideyouinsertedfacingupward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the PROG
button.
If you turn the system off while a
tape is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition, the cassette will remain in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the tape will begin playing
where it left off.
To switch to the radio or CD
changer while listening to a tape,
presstheAM,FMorCDbutton.To
change back to the cassette player,
press the TAPE button.
Dolby noise reduction turns on when
you insert a cassette. The indi-
cator will light in the display. If the
tape was not recorded with Dolby
noise reduction, turn it off by
pressing the button.
Noise reduction remains off until you
turn it on by pressing the button
again.
You can remove the cassette with
the ignition switch in any position,
even if the audio system is turned off.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the EJECT
button.
Operating the Cassette Player
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
133
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
CONTINUED
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
Fast Forward and
Rewind move the tape rapidly. To
rewind the tape, push the REW
button. You will see REW in the
display. To fast forward the tape,
push the FF button. You will see FF
displayed. Press the FF, REW or
PLAY button to take the system out
of rewind or fast forward. When the
system reaches the end of the tape,
it reverses direction and begins to
play.
Tape Search Functions
FF/REW
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
134
TTAAPPEE EEJJEECCTT
BBUUTTTTOONN
DDOOLLBBYY BBUUTTTTOONN
CCDD
BBUUTTTTOONN
AAMM
BBUUTTTTOONN
PPLLAAYY
BBUUTTTTOONN
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB
FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN RREEWW
BBUUTTTTOONN
PPRROOGG BBUUTTTTOONN FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN
TTAAPPEE DDIIRREECCTTIIOONN
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
CCAASSSSEETTTTEE SSLLOOTT
DDOOLLBBYY IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
○
○
○○
−
＋
−＋
The SKIP function allows
you to find the beginning of a song
or passage. To skip to the beginning
of a song or passage currently
playing, push the button. You will
see REW flashing in the display as
thetaperewinds.Toskiptothe
beginning of the next song, push the
button. You will see FF flashing in
the display as the tape fast forwards.
When the system finds the begin-
ning of a song or passage, it goes
back to PLAY.
To stop the SKIP function before it
finds the beginning of a song or
passage, press either of the SKIP
buttons ( or ).
SKIP
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
135
SSKKIIPP BBUUTTTTOONNSS
RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
RRPPTT BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN
FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the
button again.
Pressing the REW or FF button, or
either of the SKIP buttons, also turns
off REPEAT.
The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
REPEAT
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
136
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The cassette player picks up dirt and
oxides from the tape. This contami-
nation builds up over time and
causes the sound quality to degrade.
To prevent this, you should clean the
player after every 30 hours of use.
Your dealer has a cleaning kit
available.
If you do not clean the cassette
player regularly, it may eventually
become impossible to remove the
contamination with a normal
cleaning kit.
Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.
Cassettes longer than that use
thinner tape that may break or jam
the drive.
When they are not in use, store
cassettes in their cases to protect
them from dust and moisture. Never
place cassettes where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
or high humidity. If a cassette is
exposed to extreme heat or cold, let
it reach a moderate temperature
before inserting it in the player.
Never try to insert foreign objects
into the cassette player.
If you see the error indication
‘‘ ’’ on the display, press the
EJECT button to remove the
cassette from the unit. Make sure
the tape is not damaged. If the
cassette will not eject or the error
indication stays on after the cassette
ejects, take the car to your Acura
dealer.
If the label is peeling off, remove it
from the cassette or it could cause
the cassette to jam in the player.
Never try to insert a warped or
damaged cassette in the player.
Look at the cassette before you
insert it. If the tape is loose, tighten
it by turning a hub with a pencil or
your finger.
Caring for the Cassette Player
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
137
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To load the CDs or operate the CD
changer, the ignition switch must be
in ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
Load and play only standard round
discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in
the drive or cause other problems.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
Your Acura’s audio system has an in-
dash CD changer that holds up to six
discs, providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the radio and
cassette player.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
Operating the CD Changer
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
138
RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN
LLOOAADD BBUUTTTTOONN
PPWWRR//VVOOLL
KKNNOOBB
RRDDMM BBUUTTTTOONN CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN
SSKKIIPP BBUUTTTTOONNSS
CCDD SSLLOOTT
CCDD EEJJEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To load multiple CDs in one
operation:
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. The system will then
begin playing the last CD loaded.
If you are not loading CDs into all six
positions, press the Load button
again after the last CD has loaded.
The system will begin playing the
last CD loaded.
If you stop loading CDs before all six
positions are filled, and you do not
press the Load button, the system
will wait for ten seconds, then stop
the load operation and begin playing
the last CD loaded.
To load a single CD:
Press and release the Load button.
The system will load the CD, and
begin playing it.
When the disc number for an
empty position starts to blink and
the green CD Loaded indicator
comeson,youwillseeLOAdin
the display. Insert the disc into the
CDslot.Insertitonlyabout
halfway, the drive will pull it in the
rest of the way.
Press and hold the Load button
until you see ‘‘LOAd’’ in the
display, then release the button.
Ontheupperleftsideofthe
display, the disc number for an
empty position will begin blinking
and the green CD Loaded
indicator will come on.
Insert the disc into the CD slot.
Insert it only about halfway, the
drive will pull it in the rest of the
way.YouwillseeBUSYinthe
display. The CD Loaded indicator
turns red and blinks as the CD is
loaded.
When LOAd appears again in the
display, insert the next disc into
the CD slot.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
Loading CDs in the Changer
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
139
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you press the Load button while a
CD is playing, the system will stop
playing that CD and start the loading
sequence. It will then play the CD
just loaded.
You can also load a CD into an empty
position while a CD is playing by
pressing the appropriate preset
button. Select an empty position (the
CD Loaded indicator is off), and
press the preset button for that
position (1 to 6). The system will
stop playing the current CD and start
the loading sequence. It will then
play the CD just loaded.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
140
LLOOAADD BBUUTTTTOONN
PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONNFFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
CCDD LLOOAADDEEDD
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
CCDD SSLLOOTT
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
AAMM
BBUUTTTTOONN
CCDD SSLLOOTT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
○
○
○
○
＋
−
＋
−
Select the CD changer by pressing
the CD button. You will see ‘‘Cd’’ in
the display. The system will begin
playing the last selected disc in the
CD changer. You will see the disc
and track numbers displayed.
When that disc ends, the next disc in
the CD changer is loaded and played.
After the last disc finishes, the
system returns to disc 1.
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate Preset button (1 6). If
youselectanemptypositioninthe
CD changer, the system will go into
the loading sequence (see page ).
You can use the SKIP buttons while
a disc is playing to select passages
and change tracks.
To activate the Repeat
feature, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display as a reminder. The system
continuously replays the current
track. Press the RPT button again to
turn it off. Pressing either of the
SKIP buttons also turns off the
repeat feature.
This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks
within a CD in random order, rather
than in the order they are recorded
on the CD. To activate Random Play,
presstheRDMbutton.Youwillsee
RDM in the display. The system will
then select and play tracks randomly.
This continues until you deactivate
RandomPlaybypressingtheRDM
button again, or you select a
different CD with a preset button.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the appropriate SKIP
button. You will hear a beep and the
system will continue to move. Press
the button to move forward, or
the button to move backward.
Release the button when the system
reaches the point you want.
Each time you press the button
and release it, the system skips
forward to the beginning of the next
track. Press and release the
buttontoskipbackwardtothe
beginning of the current track. Press
and release it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track.
146
Operation
REPEAT
RANDOM PLAY
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
141
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To take the system out of CD mode,
press the AM or FM button, or insert
a cassette in the player. If a tape is
already in the cassette player, press
the TAPE button. When you return
to CD mode by pressing the CD
button, play will continue at the same
point that it left off.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or the ignition switch, play will
continue at the same point when you
turn it back on.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
142
PPWWRR//VVOOLL
KKNNOOBB
RRDDMM
BBUUTTTTOONN
SSKKIIPP
BBUUTTTTOONNSS
TTAAPPEE
BBUUTTTTOONN
AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN
RRDDMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN
RRPPTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSSRRPPTT BBUUTTTTOONN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press the Eject button. You
will see ‘‘EJEC’’ in the display. When
you remove the disc from the slot,
the system automatically begins the
Load sequence so you can load
another CD in that position. If you do
not load another CD, after ten
seconds the system begins playing
the next disc in the changer. If the
changer is empty, the system selects
the previous mode (AM, FM, or
Tape).
If you do not remove the disc from
the slot, the system will reload the
disc after 15 seconds and put the CD
changer in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
To remove a different CD from the
changer,firstselectitwiththe
appropriate preset button. When that
CD begins playing, press the Eject
button.
Removing CDs from the Changer
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
143
CCDD SSLLOOTT CCDD EEJJEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN
CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you press the Eject button while
listening to the radio or tape, or with
the audio system turned off, the disc
that was last selected is ejected.
After that disc is ejected, pressing
the Eject button again will eject the
next disc in the numerical order. By
doing this six times, you can remove
all the CDs from the changer.
In any mode, if you press the Eject
button and hold it until you hear a
beep, the system will eject all of the
discs in the changer.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first. You
can eject up to six discs, one at a
time.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
144
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the CD player or the magazine.
AnewCDmayberoughonthe
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the re-
cording surface of the disc, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the CD to not play
properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
Protecting Compact Discs
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
145
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indication
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the car to your
Acura dealer.
SolutionCause
Consult your Acura dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Consult your Acura dealer.
Disc-changer
malfunction.
High temperature.
Disc-changer
malfunction.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
CD Changer Error Indications
146
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over or try to
correct your mistake. Complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for
one hour before trying again.
If your car’s battery is disconnected
or goes dead, or the radio fuse is
removed, the audio system will
disable itself. If this happens, you
will see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency
display the next time you turn on the
system. Use the Preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code. If it is
entered correctly, the radio will start
playing.
You will have to store your favorite
stations in the Preset buttons after
the system begins working. Your
original settings were lost when
power was disconnected.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system’s code
number and serial number. It is best
tostorethiscardinasafeplaceat
home. In addition, you should write
the audio system’s serial number in
this Owner’s Manual. If you should
happen to lose the card, you must
obtain the code number from your
Honda dealer. To do this, you will
need the system’s serial number.
Your car’s audio system will disable
itself if it is disconnected from
electrical power for any reason. To
make it work again, the user must
enter a specific five-digit code in the
Preset buttons. Because there are
hundreds of number combinations
possible from five digits, making the
system work without knowing the
exact code is nearly impossible.
Only on U.S. model
Theft Protection
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
147
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Once the security system is set,
opening either door (without using
the key or the remote transmitter),
or the hood, will cause it to alarm. It
also alarms if the radio is removed
from the dashboard or the wiring is
cut.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
The security system sets auto-
matically fifteen seconds after you
lock the doors, hood, and hatch. The
security system indicator on the
instrument panel starts blinking
immediately to show you the system
is setting itself.
The security system will not set if
the hood, hatch, or either door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the Door Open Indicator on
the instrument panel (see page ),
toseeifthedoorsarefullyclosed.
Since they are not part of the
monitor display, manually check the
hood and hatch.
The security system helps to protect
your car and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights and taillights flashes if
someone attempts to break into your
carorremovetheradio.Thisalarm
continues for two minutes, then the
alarm stops. To reset an alarming
system before the two minutes have
elapsed, unlock either door with the
key or the remote transmitter.
61
Security System
Comfort and Convenience Features
148
SSEECCUURRIITTYY SSYYSSTTEEMM LLIIGGHHTT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Push in the Cruise Control Master
Switch to the left of the steering
column. The indicator in the
switch will light.
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
conditions such as city driving,
winding roads, slippery roads, heavy
rain, or bad weather. You should
have full control of the car under
those conditions. 1.
2.
U.S.:
Canada:
All models
Premium and Type-S
models only
Cruise Control
Comfort and Convenience Features
Using the Cruise Control
149
CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL MMAASSTTEERR SSWWIITTCCHH
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Press and release the SET/decel
buttononthesteeringwheel.The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel comes on to
show the system is now activated.
Thecruisecontrolmaynotholdthe
set speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down to the desired speed. This
will cancel the cruise control. To
resume the set speed, press the
RESUME/accel button. The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel comes on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshifttoholdthesetspeed.
3.
Cruise Control
Comfort and Convenience Features
150
SSEETT//ddeecceell
RREESSUUMMEE//aacccceell
CCAANNCCEELL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
You can increase the set cruising
speed in either of two ways:
Press and hold the RESUME/
accel button. The car will acceler-
ate. When you reach the desired
cruising speed, release the button.
Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-
celerate to the desired cruising
speed and press the SET/decel
button.
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in either of two ways:
Press and hold the SET/decel
button. The car will decelerate.
Release the button when you
reach the desired speed.
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The car
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake or
clutch pedal will cause the cruise
control to cancel.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RESUME/
accel button repeatedly. Each time
you do this, your car will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake or clutch pedal
lightly with your foot. The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the car slows to the desired
speed, press the SET/decel button.
The car will then maintain the
desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/decel
button repeatedly. Each time you
do this, your car will slow down
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Changing the Set Speed
Cruise Control
Comfort and Convenience Features
151
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Youcancancelthecruisecontrolin
any of these ways:
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Pressing the Cruise Control Master
Switch turns the system completely
off and erases the previous cruising
speed from memory. To use the
system again, refer to
.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
The system remembers the
previously-set cruising speed. To
return to that speed, accelerate to
above25mph(40km/h),thenpress
the RESUME/accel button. The
CRUISE CONTROL light comes on,
and the car will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
Press the Cruise Control Master
Switch.
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel will go out and the
car will begin to slow down. You can
use the accelerator pedal in the
normal way.
Cancelling the Cruise Control
Using the
Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Comfort and Convenience Features
152
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before you begin driving your Acura,
youshouldknowwhatgasolineto
use, and how to check the levels of
important fluids. You also need to
know how to properly store luggage
or packages. The information in this
section will help you. If you plan to
add any accessories to your car,
please read the information in this
section first.
.....................General Precautions . 154
.............................Break-in Period . 155
.........................................Gasoline . 155
.........Service Station Procedures . 156
................Filling the Fuel Tank . 156
....................Opening the Hood . 157
...............................Oil Check . 159
.........Engine Coolant Check . 160
...............................Fuel Economy . 161
.....................Vehicle Condition . 161
...........................Driving Habits . 161
...Accessories and Modifications . 162
.............................Carrying Cargo . 164
Before Driving
Before Driving
153
Main Menu
Curbs and steep inclines could
damage the front and rear
bumpers. Low curbs that do not
affect the average car may be high
enough to hit the bumper on your
Acura. The front or rear bumper
mayscrapewhentryingtodrive
onto an incline, such as a steep
driveway or trailer ramps.
Usecautionifyoushoulddrive
your car on very rough or rutted
roads. You could damage the
suspension and underbody by
bottoming out. Going too fast over
parking lot ‘‘speed bumps’’ can
also cause damage.
Your Acura is designed to give you
optimum handling and performance
on well-maintained roads. As part of
this design, your car has a minimum
of ground clearance.
Type-S model
General Precautions
Before Driving
154
Main Menu
Table of Contents
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Avoidhardbraking.Newbrakes
need to be broken-in by moderate
use for the first 200 miles (300
km). In Canada, some gasolines contain
an octane-enhancing additive called
MMT. If you use such gasolines,
your emissions control system
performance may deteriorate and
the Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on.
If this happens, contact your
authorized Acura dealer for service.
We recommend gasolines containing
detergent additives that help prevent
fuel system and engine deposits.
Your Acura is designed to operate on
unleaded gasoline.
Help assure your car’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
Using gasoline containing lead will
damage your car’s emissions
controls. This contributes to air
pollution.
Do not change the oil until the
recommended time or mileage
intervalshowninthemaintenance
schedule.
Youshouldfollowthesesamere-
commendations with an overhauled
or exchanged engine, or when the
brakes are relined.
Useofaloweroctanegasolinecan
cause occasional metallic knocking
noises in the engine and will result in
decreased engine performance.
Use a premium unleaded gasoline
with a pump octane number of 91 or
higher.
Use an unleaded gasoline with a
pump octane number of 86 or higher.
Useofaloweroctanegasolinecan
cause a persistent, heavy metallic
rapping noise in the engine that can
lead to mechanical damage.
(Type-S)
(All models except Type-S)
Break-in Period Gasoline
Break-in Period, Gasoline
Before Driving
155
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the fuel fill door by pulling
onthehandletotheleftofthe
driver’s seat.
Because the fuel fill cap is on the
driver’s side of the car, park with
that side closest to the service
station pumps.
Removethefuelfillcapslowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
Your car has an on-board refueling
vapor recovery system to help keep
fuel vapors from going into the
atmosphere. If the fuel nozzle keeps
clicking off even though the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with
this system. Consult your dealer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Filling the Fuel Tank
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
156
FFUUEELL FFIILLLL CCAAPP
PPuullll
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Shift to Park or Neutral and set
the parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on,
tighten it until it clicks several
times. If you do not properly
tighten the cap, the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp may come on (see
page ).
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
To find the hood latch handle, put
your fingers under the front edge
of the hood just to left of center.
Lift up the hood latch handle until
it releases the hood. Lift the hood.
1. 2.
5.
6.
276
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
Opening the Hood
157
HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE
LLAATTCCHH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender,thenletitdrop.
Afterclosingthehood,makesureit
is securely latched.
Pull the support rod out of its clip
and insert the end into the hole on
theleftsideofthehood.
If you can open the hood without
lifting the hood latch handle, or the
hood latch handle moves stiffly or
does not spring back as before, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated (see page ).
3.
224
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
158
SSUUPPPPOORRTT RROODD
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Wipe the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
Insert it all the way back in its tube.
Remove the dipstick (orange
handle).
Check the engine oil level every time
you fill the car with fuel. Wait a few
minutes after turning the engine off
before you check the oil.
2. 3.
1.
CONTINUED
Oil Check
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
159
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the dipstick again and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to
on page for information
on checking other items in your
Acura.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
4.
207
205
212
Engine Coolant Check
Adding
Engine Coolant
Owner Maintenance
Checks
Adding Oil
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
160
UUPPPPEERR MMAARRKK
MMIINN
MMAAXX
LLOOWWEERR MMAARRKK
RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A cold engine uses more fuel than a
warm engine. It is not necessary to
‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting it
idle for a long time. You can drive
away in about a minute, no matter
how cold it is outside. The engine
will warm up faster, and you get
better fuel economy. To cut down on
the number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try to
combine several short trips into one.
You can improve fuel economy by
driving moderately. Rapid acceler-
ation, abrupt cornering, and hard
braking use more fuel.
Always drive in the highest gear that
allows the engine to run and acceler-
ate smoothly.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
usemorefuel.TurnofftheA/Cto
cutdownonairconditioninguse.
Use the flow-through ventilation
when the outside air temperature is
moderate.
Always maintain your car according
to the maintenance schedule. This
will keep it in top operating condition.
An important part of that mainte-
nance is the
(see page ). For
example, an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses fuel. It also wears out
faster, so check the tire pressure at
least monthly.
In winter, the build-up of snow on
your car’s underside adds weight and
rolling resistance. Frequent cleaning
helps your fuel mileage and reduces
thechanceofcorrosion.
Depending on traffic conditions, try
to maintain a constant speed. Every
time you slow down and speed up,
your car uses extra fuel. Use the
cruise control, when appropriate, to
increase fuel economy.
The condition of your car and your
driving habits are the two most
important things that affect the fuel
mileage you get.
205
Vehicle Condition
Driving Habits
Owner Maintenance
Checks
Before Driving
Fuel Economy
161
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ).
If possible, have your dealer inspect
the final installation.
Before installing any accessory:
Have the installer contact your
Acura dealer for assistance before
installing any electronic accessory.
Modifying your car, or installing
some non-Acura accessories, can
make your car unsafe. Before you
make any modifications or add any
accessories,besuretoreadthe
following information.
Your dealer has Genuine Acura
accessories that allow you to
personalize your car. These
accessories have been designed and
approved for your car, and are
covered by warranty.
Non-Acura accessories are usually
designed for universal applications.
Although aftermarket accessories
may fit on your car, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your car’s
handling and stability. (See
‘‘Modifications’’ on the page for
additional information.)
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your car’s
computer-controlled systems, such
as the SRS and anti-lock brake
system.
However, if electronic accessories
are improperly installed, or exceed
your car’s electrical system capacity,
they can interfere with the operation
of your car, or even cause the
airbags to deploy.
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper car operation or
performance.
131
280
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
162
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
car’s handling, stability and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In addition, any modifications that
decrease ground clearance increase
the chance of undercarriage parts
striking a curb, speed bump, or other
raised object, which could cause
your airbags to deploy.
Do not modify your steering wheel
or any other part of your
Supplemental Restraint System.
Modifications could make the
system ineffective.
Do not remove any original
equipment or modify your car in any
way that would alter its design or
operation. This could make your car
unsafe and illegal to drive.
For example, do not make any
modifications that would change the
ride height of your car, or install
wheels and tires with a different
overall diameter.
Such modifications can adversely
affect handling, and interfere with
the operation of the car’s anti-lock
brakes and other systems.
Do not attach or place objects on the
airbag covers. Any object attached to
or placed on the covers marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG,’’ in the center of the
steering wheel and on top of the
dashboard, could interfere with the
proper operation of the airbags. Or,
if the airbags inflate, the objects
could be propelled inside the car and
hurt someone.
Modifications Additional Safety Precaution
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
163
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your car has several convenient
storage areas so you can stow cargo
safely.
The glove box, and the pockets in
the doors and on the passenger’s
seat-back are designed for small,
lightweight items. The cargo area is
intended for larger, heavier items. In
addition, the back seat can be folded
down to allow you to carry more
cargoorlongeritems.
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your car’s handling, stability and
operation and make it unsafe. Before
carrying any type of cargo, be sure to
read the following pages.
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
164
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Besureitemsplacedonthefloor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, or with the proper
operation of the seats.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If the lid is open, a
passenger could injure their knees
during a crash or sudden stop.
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, accessories,
and the tongue weight if you are
towing a trailer.
To figure out how much cargo you
can carry:
Add up the weight of all occupants.
If you are towing a trailer, add the
tongue weight to the number
above.
The final number is the total weight
of cargo you can carry.
Subtract the total from 700 lbs
(325 kg).
The maximum load for your car is
700 lbs (325 kg).
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Load Limit
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
165
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
hatch, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page .
If you can carry any items on a
roofrack,besurethetotalweight
of the rack and the items does not
exceed the maximum allowable
weight. Please contact your Acura
dealer for further information.
Ifyoufolddownthebackseat,tie
down items that could be thrown
about the car during a crash or
sudden stop.
Do not place items on the cargo
area cover, or stack objects higher
than the top of the back seat. They
could block your view and be
thrown about the car during a
crash or sudden stop.
49
Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
or on a Roof Rack
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
166
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
5-speed and 6-speed manual
transmissions and automatic
transmission. It also the includes
important information on parking
your car, the braking system, and
facts you need if you are planning to
tow a trailer.
........................Preparing to Drive . 168
.......................Starting the Engine . 169
Starting in Cold Weather
....................at High Altitude . 169
5-speed and 6-speed
.........Manual Transmissions . 170
.....Recommended Shift Points . 171
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 171
.......................Reverse Lockout . 172
..............Automatic Transmission . 173
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 173
................Shift Lever Positions . 173
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 178
....................Shift Lock Release . 179
...........................................Parking . 180
.....................The Braking System . 181
.............Brake Wear Indicators . 181
...............Brake System Design . 182
.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 182
Important Safety
.........................Reminders . 183
........................ABS Indicator . 183
...............Driving in Bad Weather . 184
...........................Towing a Trailer . 186
Driving
Driving
167
Main Menu
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Check the adjustment of the seat
(see page ).
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check the adjustment of the
steering wheel (see page ).
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Check the indicator lights in the
instrument panel.
Start the engine (see page ).
Check the gauges and indicator
lights in the instrument panel (see
page ).
Check that the hood and hatch are
fully closed.
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
Check that any items you may be
carrying with you inside are stored
properly or fastened down
securely.
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments every day before
you drive your car.
Make sure the doors and hatch
are securely closed and locked.
1.
2.
3.
9.
8.
7.
6.
5.
4.
10.
11.
12.
16
86
95
74
169
59
Preparing to Drive
Driving
168
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed half-way
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
If the engine still does not start,
press the accelerator pedal all the
way down and hold it there while
starting in order to clear flooding.
As before, keep the ignition key in
the START (III) position for no
more than 15 seconds. Return to
step 5 if the engine does not start.
If it starts, lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal so the engine
does not race.
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. If the engine
does not start right away, do not
hold the key in START (III) for
more than 15 seconds at a time.
Pause for at least 10 seconds
before trying again. An engine is harder to start in cold
weather. The thinner air found at
high altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters) adds to the problem.
Use the following procedure:
Turn off all electrical accessories
to reduce the drain on the battery.
Push the accelerator pedal half-
way to the floor and hold it there
while starting the engine. Do not
hold the ignition key in START
(III) for more than 15 seconds.
When the engine starts, release
the accelerator pedal gradually as
the engine speeds up and smooths
out.
If the engine fails to start in step 2,
push the accelerator pedal to the
floor and hold it there while you
try to start the engine for no more
than 15 seconds. If the engine
does not start, return to step 2.
Push the clutch pedal down all the
way. START (III) does not
function unless the clutch pedal is
depressed.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
Manual Transmission:
Automatic Transmission:
Starting the Engine
Driving
Starting in Cold Weather at High
Altitude (Above 8,000 feet/
2,400 meters)
169
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The manual transmission is syn-
chronizedinallforwardgearsfor
smooth operation. It has a lockout so
you cannot shift directly from Fifth
to Reverse. When shifting up or
down,makesureyoupushtheclutch
pedal down all the way, shift to the
next gear, and let the pedal up
gradually. When you are not shifting,
do not rest your foot on the clutch
pedal. This can cause your clutch to
wear out faster.
When slowing down, you can get
extra braking from the engine by
shifting to a lower gear. This extra
braking can help you maintain a safe
speed and prevent your brakes from
overheating while going down a
steep hill. Before downshifting,
make sure engine speed will not go
into the tachometer’s red zone in the
lower gear.
Come to a full stop before you shift
into Reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into
Reverse with the car moving. Push
down the clutch pedal, and pause for
a few seconds before shifting into
Reverse, or shift into one of the
forward gears for a moment. This
stops the gears so they won’t ‘‘grind.’’
Driving
5-speed and 6-speed Manual Transmissions
170
Rapid slowing or speeding-up
can cause loss of control on
slippery surfaces. If you crash,
you can be injured.
Use extra care when driving on
slippery surfaces.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Drive in the highest gear that lets
the engine run and accelerate
smoothly. This will give you the best
fuel economy and effective emis-
sions control. The following shift
points are recommended:
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.
Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
7mph(11km/h)
23 mph (37 km/h)
33 mph (53 km/h)
45 mph (72 km/h)
Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
Normal acceleration
14 mph (23 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)
49 mph (79 km/h)
Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
Normal acceleration
14 mph (23 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)
49 mph (79 km/h)
54 mph (87 km/h)
Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
7mph(11km/h)
23 mph (37 km/h)
33 mph (53 km/h)
45 mph (72 km/h)
50 mph (80 km/h)
Cruise from acceleration
Cruise from acceleration
5-speed
5-speed
6-speed
6-speed
Driving
Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter
5-speed and 6-speed Manual Transmissions
171
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The 6-speed manual transmission
has an electric lockout so you cannot
accidentally shift from Fifth to
Reverse instead of Sixth. If you
cannot shift to Reverse when the car
is stopped:
If you are still unable to shift to
Reverse, apply the parking brake
andturntheignitionkeyto
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).
Depress the clutch pedal and shift
to Reverse.
With the clutch pedal still de-
pressed, start the engine.
If you need to use this procedure to
shift to Reverse, your car may be
developing a problem. Have the car
checked by your Acura dealer.
With the clutch pedal depressed,
move the shift lever to the First/
Second gear side of the Neutral
gate, then shift to Reverse.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Driving
5-speed and 6-speed Manual Transmissions
Reverse Lockout
172
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The shift lever has five positions. It
must be in Park or Neutral to start
the engine. When you are stopped in
D, D , N, R or the manual mode,
press firmly on the brake pedal and
keep your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Your Acura’s transmission has five
forward speeds, and is electronically
controlled for smoother shifting. It
also has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converter
forbetterfueleconomy.Youmay
feel what seems like another shift
when the converter locks.
This indicator on the instrument
panel shows which position the shift
lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II). If it flashes
at any time (in any shift position), it
indicates a possible problem in the
transmission. Avoid rapid
acceleration and have the
transmission checked by an
authorized Acura dealer as soon as
possible.
3
CONTINUED
Shift Lever Position Indicator Shift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission
Driving
173
SSHHIIFFTT LLEEVVEERR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoN
NtoD
DtoD
DtoD
DtoN
NtoR
RtoP
Do this:
Press the brake pedal, then
move the shift lever.
Move the lever.
3
3
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on page
.
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. The shift lever must be in
Park before you can remove the key
from the ignition switch.
This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Move the shift
lever to the side to shift out of the
Park position.
YoucannotshiftoutofParkwiththe
brake pedal depressed when the
ignition switch is in LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I).
178
Park (P)
Automatic Transmission
Driving
174
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−−
−
−
−To shift to Reverse
from Park, see the explanation under
Park. To shift to Reverse from
Neutral, come to a complete stop and
then shift.
Your car has a reverse lockout so
you cannot accidentally shift to
Reverse from Neutral or any other
driving position when the car speed
exceeds 5 6 mph (8 10 km/h).
If you cannot shift to Reverse when
the car is stopped, press the brake
pedal and slowly shift to Neutral, and
then to Reverse.
If there is a problem in the reverse
lockout system, or your car’s battery
is disconnected or goes dead, you
cannot shift to Reverse. (Refer to
Shift Lock Release on page ).
Use Neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to Park posi-
tion if you need to leave the car for
any reason. Press on the brake pedal
when you are moving the shift lever
from Neutral to another gear.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The transmis-
sion automatically selects a suitable
gear for your speed and acceleration.
This position is simi-
lartoD,exceptonlythefirstthree
gears are selected. Use D when
towing a trailer in hilly terrain, or to
provide engine braking when going
down a steep hill. D can also keep
the transmission from cycling third,
fourth and fifth gears in stop-and-go
driving.
ForfasteraccelerationwheninD or
D, you can get the transmission to
automatically downshift by pushing
the accelerator pedal to the floor.
The transmission will shift down one,
two or three gears, depending on
your speed.
178
3
3
3
Reverse (R) Neutral (N)
Drive (D)
Drive (D )
3
Automatic Transmission
Driving
175
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＋＋
−−
With
the shift lever in ‘‘D’’ position, you
can select the Sequential SportShift
Mode to shift gears; much like a
manual transmission, but without a
clutch pedal.
When you accelerate away from a
stop, the transmission will be in first
gear. The transmission will not
automatically upshift. Watch the
tachometer and upshift manually
before the engine reaches redline.
The transmission remains in the
selectedgear(5,4,3,2,or1).There
is no automatic downshift when you
push the accelerator pedal to the
floor.
To enter the Sequential SportShift
Mode, move the shift lever further to
the driver’s side. To return to ‘‘D’’,
move the shift lever to the
passenger’s side.
When you move the shift lever from
‘‘D’’ to the Sequential SportShift
mode, the display shows the selected
gear.
In Sequential SportShift mode, each
time you push forward on the shift
lever the transmission will shift to a
higher gear. Pull back on the lever to
downshift. The number of the gear
selected is displayed on the
instrument panel (see page ).227
Sequential SportShift Mode
Automatic Transmission
Driving
176
UUpp sshhiifftt
DDoowwnn sshhiifftt
Main Menu
Table of Contents
→−
−
→−
−
→
→
→
→
→
→
Downshifting gives you more power
when climbing or provides engine
braking when going down a steep hill.
If you try to manually downshift at a
speed that would cause the engine to
exceed the redline in a lower gear,
the transmission will not downshift.
Thegearindicatorwillflashthe
numberofthelowergearseveral
times, then return to the higher gear.
If the car speed slows to below the
redline of the selected lower gear
position while the indicator is
flashing, the transmission will
downshift and the display will show
the selected lower gear.
The transmission will also shift
automatically as the car comes to a
complete stop. It will downshift to
first gear when the car speed is
under 6 mph (10 km/h).
The transmission may automatically
downshift from the higher gear to
the lower gear under the following
conditions:
If you drive uphill between
54:4533mph
(72 52 km/h)
43:3320mph
(52 32 km/h)
The car speeds drops below
5 4:33mph(52km/h)
4 3:20mph(32km/h) Thetableshowsthespeedranges
for upshifting and downshifting.
To shift from
12
23
34
45
Speed range
over 0 mph
(0 km/h)
over 6 mph
(10 km/h)
over 20 mph
(32 km/h)
over 33 mph
(52 km/h)
If you press the brake pedal as you
drive downhill.
Automatic Transmission
Driving
177
Main Menu
Table of Contents
→
→
→
→
To shift from
21
32
43
54
Speed range
under 31 mph
(50 km/h)
under 63 mph
(100 km/h)
under 94 mph
(150 km/h)
under 131 mph
(210 km/h)
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the
tachometer’s red zone. If this
occurs,youmayfeeltheengine
cut in and out. This is caused by a
limiter in the engine’s computer
controls. The engine will run
normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
When you are in Sequential
Sportshift mode, and the vehicle is
stopped, push forward on the shift
lever to shift to second gear. You will
see ‘‘2’’ in the display. Starting out in
second gear will help to reduce
wheelspin in deep snow or on a
slippery surface.
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Engine Speed LimiterStarting in Second Gear
178
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you need to use the Shift Lock
Release, it means your car is
developing a problem. Have the car
checked by your Acura dealer.
Remove the screwdriver from the
shift lock release slot, then install
anewcover.
Depress the brake pedal and
restart the engine.
Insert a small screwdriver in the
Shift Lock Release slot.
Push down on the key while you
move the shift lever out of Park to
Neutral.
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal does not work.
Set the Parking brake.
Make sure the ignition switch is in
LOCK (0) position.
Put a cloth on the edge of the Shift
Lock Release slot cover next to
the shift lever.
Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver
or small metal plate (neither are
included in the tool kit) to remove
the cover. Carefully pry off the
edge of the cover.
5.
4.
3.
2.
1.
6.
Shift Lock Release
Automatic Transmission
Driving
179
SSHHIIFFTT LLOOCCKK
RREELLEEAASSEE SSLLOOTT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Make sure the moonroof and the
windows are closed.
Turn off the lights.
Make sure the parking brake is fully
released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or damage
the rear brakes.
Always use the parking brake when
you park your car. The indicator on
the instrument panel shows that the
parking brake is not fully released; it
does not indicate that the parking
brakeisfirmlyset.Makesurethe
parking brake is set firmly or your
car may roll if it is parked on an
incline.
If your car has an automatic
transmission, set the parking brake
before you put the transmission in
Park.Thiskeepsthecarfrom
moving and putting pressure on the
parking mechanism in the
transmission making it easier to
move the shift lever out of Park
when you want to drive away.
If the car is facing uphill, turn the
front wheels away from the curb. If
you have a manual transmission, put
it in first gear.
If the car is facing downhill, turn the
front wheels toward the curb. If you
have a manual transmission, put it in
reverse gear.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the cargo area or take them
with you.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The three way catalytic
converter gets very hot, and could
cause these materials to catch on
fire.
Lock the doors.
Parking Tips
Parking
Driving
180
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check your brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Since a
longer distance is needed to stop
with wet brakes, be extra cautious
and alert in your driving.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by downshifting to a lower
gear and taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
All four brakes have audible brake
wear indicators.
When the brake pads need replacing,
you will hear a distinctive metallic
‘‘screeching’’ sound when you apply
the brakes. If you do not have the
brake pads replaced, they will begin
screeching all the time.
Your brakes may sometimes squeal
or squeak when you apply them
lightly. Do not confuse this with the
brake wear indicators. They make a
very audible ‘‘screeching.’’
Your Acura is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The ABS helps
you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
Put your foot on the brake pedal only
when you intend to brake. Resting
your foot on the pedal keeps the
brakes applied lightly, causing them
to build up heat. Heat build-up can
reduce how well your brakes work. It
also keeps your brake lights on all
the time, confusing drivers behind
you.
Brake Wear Indicators
The Braking System
Driving
181
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Your car has an Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS) as standard
equipment. ABS helps to prevent the
wheels from locking up and skidding
during hard braking, allowing you to
retain steering control.
When the front tires skid, you lose
steering control; the car continues
straightaheadeventhoughyouturn
the steering wheel. The ABS helps to
prevent lock-up and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly; much faster than a
person can do it.
this defeats the
purpose of the ABS. Let the ABS
work for you by always keeping firm,
steady pressure on the brake pedal
as you steer away from the hazard.
This is sometimes referred to as
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal, it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes.
Activation varies with the amount of
traction your tires have. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforeyou
activate the ABS. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
‘‘stomp and steer.’’
U.S.:
Canada:
All models
Premium and Type-S
models only
Brake System Design Anti-lock Brakes You should never pump the
brake pedal,
The Braking System
Driving
182
FFrroonntt
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊＊
＊＊
it
only helps with steering control
during braking. You should always
maintain a safe following distance
from other vehicles.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe,
prudent speed for the road and
weather conditions.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your car to veer into
oncoming traffic or off the road.
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock. Slow down and allow a greater
distance between vehicles under
those conditions.
The ABS is self-checking. If anything
goes wrong, the ABS indicator on
the instrument panel comes on (see
page ). This means the anti-lock
function of the braking system has
shut down. The brakes still work like
a conventional system without anti-
lock, providing normal stopping
ability. You should have the dealer
inspect your car as soon as possible.
61
Important Safety Reminders ABS Indicator
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the car,
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
The Braking System
Driving
183
AABBSS IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−− Being able to see
clearly in all directions and being
visible to other drivers are important
in all weather conditions. This is
more difficult in bad weather. To be
seen more clearly during daylight
hours, turn on your headlights.
Inspect your windshield wipers and
washers frequently. Keep the wind-
shield washer reservoir full of the
proper fluid. Have the windshield
wiper blades replaced if they start to
streak the windshield or leave parts
unwiped. Use the defrosters and air
conditioning to keep the windows
from fogging up on the inside (see
page ).
Exercise extra caution when driving
in rain after a long dry spell. After
months of dry weather, the first
rains bring oil to the surface of the
roadway, making it slippery.
Rain, fog, and snow conditions
require a different driving technique
because of reduced traction and
visibility. Keep your car well-
maintained and exercise greater
caution when you need to drive in
bad weather. The cruise control
should not be used in these
conditions.
Always drive
slower than you would in dry
weather. It takes your car longer to
react, even in conditions that may
seem just barely damp. Apply
smooth, even pressure to all the
controls. Abrupt steering wheel
movements or sudden, hard appli-
cation of the brakes can cause loss of
control in wet weather. Be extra
cautious for the first few miles
(kilometers) of driving while you
adjust to the change in driving
conditions. This is especially true in
snow. A person can forget some
snow-driving techniques during the
summer months. Practice is needed
to relearn those skills. 107
VisibilityDriving Technique
Driving in Bad Weather
Driving
184
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− Check your tires
frequently for wear and proper
pressure. Both are important in
preventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss of
traction on a wet surface). In the
winter, mount snow tires on all four
wheels for the best handling.
Watch road conditions carefully,
they can change from moment to
moment. Wet leaves can be as slip-
pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can have
patches of ice. Driving conditions
can be very hazardous when the
outside temperature is near freezing.
The road surface can become
covered with areas of water puddles
mixed with areas of ice, so your
traction can change without warning.
Be careful when downshifting. If
traction is low, you can lock up the
drive wheels for a moment and cause
askid.
Be very cautious when passing, or
beingpassedbyothervehicles.The
spray from large vehicles reduces
your visibility, and the wind buffeting
can cause you to lose control.
Traction
Driving in Bad Weather
Driving
185
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Acura has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can use it to tow a
trailer if you carefully observe the
load limits, use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
The total
weight of the trailer and
everything loaded in it must not
exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing
a load that is too heavy can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
The weight that
the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
puts on the hitch should be
approximately 10 percent of the
trailer weight. Too little tongue
load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway. Too much
tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control.
Total Trailer Weight:
Load Limits
Tongue Load:
Towing a Trailer
Driving
186
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60 percent of the
load toward the front of the trailer
and 40 percent toward the rear, then
re-adjust the load as needed.
The total weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all cargo, the
tongue load must not exceed:
The total weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all cargo, and the
tongue load must not exceed:
on the front axle
on the rear axle
and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
Towing a Trailer
Driving
187
3,660 lbs (1,660 kg)
1,950 lbs (885 kg)
1,775 lbs (805 kg)
Exceeding load limits or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously
injured or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The best way to confirm that vehicle
and trailer weights are within limits
is to have them checked at a public
scale.
Using a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge, check the tongue
load the first time you set up a
towing combination (a fully-loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
Towing can require a variety of
equipment, depending on the size of
your trailer, how it will be used, and
how much load you are towing.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in the rest of this section.
Also make sure that all equipment is
properly installed and that it meets
federal, state, province, and local
regulations.
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody.
Always use safety chains. Make sure
they are secured to both the trailer
and hitch, and that they cross under
the tongue so they can catch the
trailer if it becomes unhitched.
Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do
not let the chains drag on the ground.
Checking Loads Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Hitches
Safety Chains
Towing a Trailer
Driving
188
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard. Since lighting and wiring vary in
trailer type and brand, you should
also have a qualified mechanic install
a suitable connector between the
vehicleandthetrailer.
If you use a converter, you can get
the connector and pins that mate
with the connector in your vehicle
from your Acura dealer.
Acura recommends that any trailer
having a total weight of 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) or more be equipped with
its own electric or surge-type brakes.
Your vehicle has a trailer lighting
connector located behind the right
side panel in the cargo area. Refer to
thedrawingaboveforthewiring
color code and purpose of each pin.
Trailer Brakes Trailer Lights
Towing a Trailer
Driving
189
LLEEFFTT TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL
((GGRREEEENN//RREEDD))
BBRRAAKKEE LLIIGGHHTT
((WWHHIITTEE//BBLLAACCKK))
GGRROOUUNNDD
((BBLLAACCKK))
TTAAIILLLLIIGGHHTT
((RREEDD//YYEELLLLOOWW))
RRIIGGHHTT TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL
((GGRREEEENN//YYEELLLLOOWW))
BBAACCKK UUPP LLIIGGHHTT
((GGRREEEENN))
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Many states and Canadian provinces
require special outside mirrors when
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,
you should install special mirrors if
you cannot clearly see behind you, or
if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Askyourtrailersalesorrental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, and cooling system
are in good operating condition.
Allitemsonandinthetrailerare
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated (see page ),
and the trailer tires and spare are
inflated as recommended by the
trailer maker.
Thehitch,safetychains,andany
other attachments are secure.
All weights and loads are within
limits (see page ).
235
187
Pre-Tow Checklist
Additional Trailer Equipment
Towing a Trailer
Driving
190
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof
others,taketimetopracticedriving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
discussed below.
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
If you have an automatic
transmission, use D position when
towing a trailer on level roads. D is
the proper shift lever position to use
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain.
(See ‘‘ ’’ in the next
column for additional gear
information.)
Maketurnsmoreslowlyandwider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
canhitorrunoversomethingthe
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently between 3rd and 4th
gears while going up a hill, shift to
D.
3
3
Driving Safely With a Trailer
Towing Speeds and Gears
Driving on Hills
Making Turns and Braking Driving on Hills
Towing a Trailer
Driving
191
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park (automatic) or
in 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,
place wheel chocks at each of the
trailer’s tires.
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
andturnthewheelrighttomovethe
trailer to the right.
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause trailer
swaying. When being passed by a
large vehicle, keep a constant speed
and steer straight ahead. Do not try
to make quick steering or braking
corrections.
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
placebypressingontheaccelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and shift down to 2nd
gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember it will take longer to slow
downandstopwhentowingatrailer.
bottom
Parking
Backing Up
Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
Towing a Trailer
Driving
192
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section also includes
Maintenance Schedules for normal
driving and severe driving conditions,
a Maintenance Record, and instruc-
tions for simple maintenance tasks
you may want to take care of
yourself.
If you have the skills and tools to per-
form more complex maintenance
tasks on your Acura, you may want
to purchase the Service Manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your Acura
dealer.
This section explains why it is
important to keep your car well
maintained and to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
......................Maintenance Safety . 194
.Important Safety Precautions . 195
.................Maintenance Schedule . 196
...Required Maintenance Record . 203
.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 205
..............................Fluid Locations . 206
......................................Engine Oil . 207
..................................Adding Oil . 207
....................Recommended Oil . 207
..............................Synthetic Oil . 209
....................................Additives . 209
.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 209
.............................Cooling System . 212
............Adding Engine Coolant . 212
.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 214
....................Windshield Washers . 216
.......................Transmission Fluid . 217
Automatic
.........................Transmission . 217
..............Manual Transmission . 219
................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 219
............................Brake System . 220
...........................Clutch System . 220
..............................Power Steering . 221
.....................Air Cleaner Element . 222
....................................Hood Latch . 224
....................................Spark Plugs . 224
..............................Replacement . 224
............................Specifications . 226
...........................................Battery . 226
.................................Wiper Blades . 229
..............Air Conditioning System . 231
..................DustandPollenFilter .232
.....................................Drive Belts . 234
...............................................Tires . 235
......................................Inflation . 235
..................................Inspection . 236
..............................Maintenance . 237
.............................Tire Rotation . 238
...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 239
......................Wheels and Tires . 240
..........................Winter Driving . 240
.............................Snow Tires . 241
............................Tire Chains . 241
.............................................Lights . 242
.....................Headlight Aiming . 244
........................Replacing Bulbs . 244
...........................Storing Your Car . 252
306
Maintenance
Maintenance
193
Main Menu
This section includes instructions for
simple maintenance tasks, such as
checking and adding oil. Any service
items not detailed in this section
should be performed by an Acura
technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Regularly maintaining your car is the
best way to protect your investment.
Proper maintenance is essential to
your safety and the safety of your
passengers. It will also reward you
with more economical, trouble-free
driving and help reduce air pollution.
Maintenance
Maintenance Safety
194
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Improperly maintaining this car
or failing to correct a problem
before driving can cause a
crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Be sure
there is adequate ventilation
whenever you operate the engine.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
before touching any parts.
Do
not run the engine unless in-
structed to do so.
Read the instructions before you
begin, and make sure you have the
tools and skills required.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, be careful when working
around gasoline or batteries. Use a
commercially available degreaser or
parts cleaner, not gasoline, to clean
parts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, and
flames away from the battery and all
fuel-related parts.
Before you begin any maintenance,
make sure your car is parked on
level ground and that the parking
brake is set. Also, be sure the engine
is off. This will help to eliminate
several potential hazards:
You should wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
near the battery or when using
compressed air.
Maintenance Safety
Maintenance
Important Safety Precautions
Carbon monoxide poisoning
from engine exhaust.
Burns from hot parts.
Injury from moving parts.
195
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The Maintenance Schedule specifies
how often you should have your car
serviced and what things need
attention. It is essential that you have
your car serviced as scheduled to
retain its high level of safety,
dependability, and emissions control
performance.
Avoidexceedingyourcar’sload
limit.Thisputsexcessstresson
the engine, brakes, and many
other parts of your car. The load
limit is shown on the label on the
driver’s doorjamb.
Operate your car on reasonable
roads within the legal speed limit.
Drive your car regularly over a
distance of several miles
(kilometers).
Always use unleaded gasoline with
the proper octane rating (see page
).
The services and time or distance
intervals shown in the maintenance
schedule assume you will use your
car as normal transportation for
passengers and their possessions.
You should also follow these
recommendations:
Service your car according to the
time and mileage periods on one of
the Maintenance Schedules on the
following pages.
Follow the
Maintenance Schedule for Severe
Conditions if you drive your car
MAINLY under one or more of the
following conditions.
Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)
per trip or, in freezing
temperatures, driving less than 10
miles (16 km) per trip.
Driving in extremely hot [over
90°F (32°C)] conditions.
Extensive idling or long periods of
stop-and-go driving.
155
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance
U.S. Owners
Which Schedule to Follow:
196
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＃
−
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, Acura
recommends that all maintenance
services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage
period to ensure long-term reliability.
Trailer towing, driving with a car
top carrier, or driving in
mountainous conditions.
Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-
iced roads.
NOTE: If you only OCCASIONALLY
or NEVER, drive under a ‘‘severe’’
condition, you should follow the
Maintenance Schedule for Normal
Conditions.
U.S. Vehicles:
We recommend the use of genuine
Acura parts and fluids whenever you
have maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
Your authorized Acura dealer knows
your car best and can provide
competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Keep all the
receipts as proof of completion, and
have the person who does the work
fill out the Maintenance Record.
Check your warranty booklet for
more information.
Follow the
Maintenance Schedule for Severe
Conditions.
Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance, replacement or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
Canadian Owners
197
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＃
＃＃
＊
＃
Maintenance
198
Service at the indicated distance or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
months
Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
Service the following items at the recommended intervals
Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km) or 7 years
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,
then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Check engine oil and coolant
Replace engine oil
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once per month)
Replace engine oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots, Suspension components
Driveshaft boots, Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system, Fuel lines and connections
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Replace dust and pollen filter
Replace transmission fluid
Replace air cleaner element
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
Replace brake fluid
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
10
16
20
32
30
48
40
64
50
80
60
96
70
112
80
128
90
144
100
160
110
176
120
192
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .
See Dust and Pollen Filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then
every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years
Every 3 years
24 48 7212 36 60
M/T
A/T
1:
:
232
197
1
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
＃
＊
＃
＃
＃
＊
Maintenance
199
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
A
B
C
D
E
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first.
Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.
Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.
10,000 mi/16,000 km/1 yr
20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr
30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs
40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs
50,000 mi/80,000 km/3 yrs
60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs
70,000 mi/112,000 km/4 yrs
80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs
90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs
100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs
110,000 mi/176,000 km
110,000 mi/176,000 km/6 yrs
110,000 mi/176,000 km/7 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
DoitemsinA,C,D.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A, E.
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
DoitemsinA,C,D.
Do items in A, B.
Inspect valve clearance, cold engine.
Replace spark plugs.
Do items in A, E.
Inspect idle speed.
Replace transmission fluid (M/T, A/T).
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Replace engine coolant.
Replace engine oil.
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 238 ).
Replace engine oil filter.
Inspect front and rear brakes.
Check parking brake adjustment.
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.
Inspect suspension components.
Inspect driveshaft boots.
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect fuel lines and connections.
Inspect and adjust drive belts.
Replace dust and pollen filter.
Replace air cleaner element every 30,000 mi/48,000
km (independent of time).
Replace brake fluid every 3 years (independent of
mileage).
:
196
1:
1
See Dust and Pollen Filter on page for replacement
information under special driving conditions.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
NOTE:
197
236
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＃
＃＃
＊
＃
Maintenance
200
Service at the indicated distance or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
months
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,
then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km) or 7 years
Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)
Service the following items at the recommended intervals
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .
Check engine oil and coolant
Replace engine oil
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once per month)
Replace engine oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Lubricate all hinges, looks, and latches
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots, Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Check parking brake adjustment
Visually inspect the following items:
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system, Fuel lines and connections
Lights and controls, Vehicle underbody
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Replace dust and pollen filter
Replace transmission fluid
Clean or replace air cleaner element
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
Replace brake fluid
Replace every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
See Dust and Pollen Filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.
10
16
20
32
30
48
40
64
50
80
60
96
70
112
80
128
90
144
100
160
110
176
120
192
Every 3 years
24 48 7212 36 60
1:
: 197
M/T
A/T
232
1
Clean every 15,000 miles (24,000 km), and replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
(Use normal schedule except in dusty conditions)
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
＃
＃
＊
CONTINUED
Maintenance
201
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
A
B
C
D
E
F
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first.
Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.
Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.
5,000 mi/8,000 km/6 mos
10,000 mi/16,000 km/1 yr
15,000 mi/24,000 km/1-½ yrs
20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr
25,000 mi/40,000 km/2 yrs
30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs
35,000 mi/56,000 km/2-½ yrs
40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs
45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs
50,000 mi/80,000 km/3 yrs
55,000 mi/88,000 km/3-½ yrs
60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs
65,000 mi/104,000 km/4 yrs
70,000 mi/112,000 km/4 yrs
75,000 mi/120,000 km/4-½ yrs
80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs
85,000 mi/136,000 km/5 yrs
90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs
Replace engine oil.
Inspect front and rear brakes.
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 238 ).
Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches.
Replace engine oil filter.
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.
Inspect suspension components.
Inspect driveshaft boots.
Check parking brake adjustment.
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect fuel lines and connections.
Check all lights.
Inspect the underbody.
Inspect and adjust drive belts.
Replace air cleaner element (independent of time).
Replace dust and pollen filter .
Clean air cleaner element every 15,000 mi/
24,000 km (independent of time).
Replace brake fluid every 3 years (independent of
mileage).
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A, E.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,D.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
DoitemsinA,E,F.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Replace transmission fluid (M/T, A/T).
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A, E.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do items in A.
Replace transmission fluid (A/T).
DoitemsinA,B,D.
196
1
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
□
□
□
□
□
＃
＊
＃
Maintenance
202
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information
under special driving conditions.
NOTE:
1:
:
197
232
95,000 mi/152,000 km/5-½ yrs
100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs
105,000 mi/168,000 km/6 yrs
110,000 mi/176,000 km
110,000 mi/176,000 km/6 yrs
110,000 mi/176,000 km/7 yrs
115,000 mi/184,000 km/6-½ yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
DoitemsinA,E,F
Inspect valve clearance, cold engine.
Replace spark plugs.
Do items in A, B.
Inspect idle speed.
Do items in A.
Replace transmission fluid (M/T, A/T).
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Replace engine coolant.
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Maintenance
Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
203
5,000 mi
10,000 mi
15,000 mi
20,000 mi
25,000 mi
30,000 mi
35,000 mi
40,000 mi
45,000 mi
50,000 mi
55,000 mi
60,000 mi
Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp
8,000 km
16,000 km
24,000 km
32,000 km
(or 1 year)
40,000 km
48,000 km
56,000 km
64,000 km
(or 2 years)
72,000 km
80,000 km
88,000 km
96,000 km
(or 3 years)
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severe
conditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your car.
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
200
198
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance
Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
204
65,000 mi
70,000 mi
75,000 mi
80,000 mi
85,000 mi
90,000 mi
95,000 mi
100,000 mi
105,000 mi
110,000 mi
115,000 mi
120,000 mi
Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp
104,000 km
112,000 km
120,000 km
128,000 km
(or 4 years)
136,000 km
144,000 km
152,000 km
160,000 km
(or 5 years)
168,000 km
176,000 km
184,000 km
192,000 km
(or 6 years)
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
youfillthefueltank.Seepage .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
Windshield washer fluid Check
the level in the reservoir monthly.
If weather conditions cause you to
use the washers frequently, check
the reservoir each time you stop
for fuel. See page .
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the page given.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
turn signals, brake lights, and
license plate lights monthly. See
page .
159
216
217
219
235
244
160
Owner Maintenance Checks
Maintenance
205
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fluid Locations
Maintenance
206
EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL
FFIILLLL CCAAPP
((BBllaacckk ccaapp))
BBRRAAKKEE FFLLUUIIDD
((GGrraayy ccaapp))
RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP
EENNGGIINNEE CCOOOOLLAANNTT
RREESSEERRVVOOIIRR
PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGG
FFLLUUIIDD ((RReedd ccaapp))
AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC
TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN
FFLLUUIIDD DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK
((YYeellllooww lloooopp))
((MMaannuuaall TTrraannssmmiissssiioonn oonnllyy))
CCLLUUTTCCHH FFLLUUIIDD
((GGrraayy ccaapp))
WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD
((BBlluuee ccaapp))
EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK
((OOrraannggee lloooopp))
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
To add oil, unscrew and remove the
engine oil fill cap on top of the valve
cover. Pour in the oil, and install the
engine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.
Wait a few minutes and recheck the
oil level. Do not fill above the upper
mark; you could damage the engine.
Make sure the API Certification Seal
says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’Oil is major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your car for as
long as you own it.
Adding Oil Recommended Oil
Engine Oil
Maintenance
207
AAPPII CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN SSEEAALL
EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL FFIILLLL CCAAPP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The SAE numbers tell you the oil’s
viscosity or weight. Select the oil for
your car according to this chart.
An oil with a viscosity of 5W-30 is
preferred for improved fuel economy
and year-round protection in your
Acura. You may use a 10W-30 oil if
the temperature in your area never
goes below 20°F ( 7°C).
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your Acura, to
improve cold weather starting, and
to help your engine use less fuel.
If 5W-20 oil is not available, a 5W-30
oil may be used. However, it should
be replaced with 5W-20 at the next
oil change.
RSX and Premium models Type-S
Engine Oil
Maintenance
208
AAmmbbiieenntt TTeemmppeerraattuurreeAAmmbbiieenntt TTeemmppeerraattuurree
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always change the oil and filter
accordingtothetimeanddistance
(miles/kilometers) recommenda-
tions in the maintenance schedule.
The oil and filter collect contami-
nants that can damage your engine if
they are not removed regularly.
Your Acura does not need any oil
additives. Purchasing additives for
the engine or transmission will not
increase your car’s performance or
longevity. It only increases the cost
of operating your car.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the car. The car should
be raised on a service station-type
hydraulic lift for this service. Unless
you have the knowledge and proper
equipment, you should have this
maintenancedonebyaskilled
mechanic.
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight as shown
on the chart. When using synthetic
oil, you must follow the oil and filter
change intervals given in the
maintenance schedule.
CONTINUED
Synthetic Oil Additives Changing the Oil and Filter
Engine Oil
Maintenance
209
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the oil filter and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your Acura
dealer) is required to remove the
filter.
Install a new oil filter according to
instructions that come with it.
Open the hood and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
4.
3.2.
1.
Engine Oil
Maintenance
210
OOIILL FFIILLTTEERR
WWAASSHHEERR
OOIILL DDRRAAIINN BBOOLLTT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level. If necessary, add oil to bring
the level to the upper mark on the
dipstick.
Let the engine run for several
minutes and check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten it to:
Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator light should go out within
five seconds. If it does not, turn off
the engine and reinspect your
work.
Refill the engine with the recom-
mended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
7.
8.
9.
5.
6.
(RSX and Premium models)
(Type-S)
(RSX and Premium models)
(Type-S)
Engine Oil
Maintenance
211
33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
4.4 US qt (4.2
, 3.7 Imp qt)
5.0 US qt (4.7
, 4.1 Imp qt)
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
This coolant should always be a
mixtureof50percentantifreezeand
50 percent water. Never add straight
antifreeze or plain water.
Always use Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water. It
does not require any additional
mixing. If it is not available, you may
use another major-brand non-silicate
coolant as a temporary replacement.
Make sure it is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
However, continued use of any non-
Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling
system to malfunction or fail. Have
the cooling system flushed and
refilled with Honda antifreeze/
coolant as soon as possible.
Adding Engine Coolant
Cooling System
Maintenance
212
MMIINN
MMAAXX
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure the engine and
radiator are cool.
Turn the radiator cap counter-
clockwise, without pressing down
on it, until it stops. This relieves
any pressure remaining in the
cooling system.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
Put the radiator cap back on.
Tighten it fully.
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your car’s cooling
system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or engine compo-
nents.
6.
5.
4.
2.
3.
1.
Cooling System
Maintenance
213
RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP
RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Openthehood.Makesurethe
engine and radiator are cool to the
touch.
Remove the radiator cap.
Thecoolingsystemshouldbe
completely drained and refilled with
new coolant according to the time
and distance recommendations in
the maintenance schedule. Only use
Honda All Season Antifreeze/
Coolant Type 2.
Draining the coolant requires access
to the underside of the car. Unless
you have the tools and knowledge,
you should have this maintenance
done by a skilled mechanic. Remove the cover under the
radiator.
Turn the ignition ON (II). Turn
the temperature control dial to
maximum heat. Turn the ignition
off.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cooling System
Maintenance
Replacing Engine Coolant
214
CCOOVVEERR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the level in the windshield
washer reservoir at least monthly
during normal usage. In bad weather,
when you use the washers often,
check the level every time you stop
for fuel. This reservoir supplies the
windshield and rear window washers.
The cooling system capacity is:
Start the engine and let it run for
about 30 seconds. Then turn off
the engine.
Fill the radiator with coolant up to
the base of the filler neck.
Fill the reserve tank to the MAX
mark. Install the reserve tank cap.
Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it to the first stop.
Start the engine and let it run until
the radiator cooling fan comes on
at least twice. Then stop the
engine.
Remove the radiator cap. Fill the
radiator with coolant up to the
base of the filler neck.
Start the engine and hold it at
1,500 rpm until the radiator fan
comes on. Turn off the engine.
Check the coolant level in the
radiator and add coolant if needed.
Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it fully.
If necessary, fill the reserve tank
to the MAX mark. Install the
reserve tank cap.
9.
11.
10.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
With automatic transmission:
Manual Transmission:
Maintenance
Cooling System, Windshield Washers
Windshield Washers
216
1.35 US gal (5.1 , 1.12 Imp gal)
1.32 US gal (5.0
, 1.10 Imp gal)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The windshield washer reservoir is
located behind the driver’s side
headlight. Check the reservoir’s fluid
level by removing the cap and
looking at the level gauge attached
to the cap.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
Park the car on level ground. Shut
off the engine.
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
Windshield Washers, Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission
217
WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD WWAASSHHEERR RREESSEERRVVOOIIRR
LLEEVVEELL GGAAUUGGEE
DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir.
Antif reeze can damage your car’s paint,
while a vinegar/water solution can
damage the windshield washer pump.
Use only commercially-available
windshield washer f luid.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the filler hole
to bring it to the upper mark.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If it
is not available, you may use a
DEXRON
III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect shift quality. Have the
transmission flushed and refilled
with Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it is
convenient.
To thoroughly flush the transmission,
the technician should drain and refill
it with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive the
vehicle a short distance. Do this
three times. Then drain and refill the
transmission a final time.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
5. 6.
4.
3.
Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
218
UUPPPPEERR
MMAARRKK
LLOOWWEERR
MMAARRKK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If Honda MTF is not available, you
may use an API service SG, SH or SJ
grade motor oil with a viscosity of
SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 as a
temporary replacement. An SG
grade is preferred, but an SH or SJ
grade may be used if SG is not
available. However, motor oil does
not contain the proper additives and
continued use can cause stiffer
shifting. Replace as soon as it is
convenient.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
Check the fluid level in the reser-
voirs monthly. There are up to two
reservoirs, depending on the model.
They are:
Brake fluid reservoir (all models)
Clutch fluid reservoir
(manual transmission only)
The brake fluid should be replaced
according to the time recommenda-
tion in the maintenance schedule.
Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the car sitting on
level ground. Remove the
transmission filler bolt and carefully
feel inside the bolt hole with your
finger. The fluid level should be up
to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is
not, add Honda Manual Transmis-
sion Fluid (MTF) until it starts to
run out of the hole. Reinstall the
filler bolt and tighten it securely.
CONTINUED
Brake and Clutch FluidManual Transmission
Transmission Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid
Maintenance
219
FFIILLLLEERR BBOOLLTT
CCoorrrreecctt lleevveell
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement. However, the use of
any non-Honda brake fluid can cause
corrosion and decrease the life of the
system. Have the brake system
flushed and refilled with Honda
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as
soon as possible.
The fluid should be between the
MIN and MAX marks on the side of
the reservoir. If it is not, add brake
fluid to bring it up to that level. Use
the same fluid specified for the
brake system.
Low fluid level can indicate a leak in
the clutch system. Have this system
inspected as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your car’s braking
system and can cause extensive
damage.
Brake System Clutch System
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Maintenance
220
MMAAXX
MMIINN
MMAAXX
MMIINN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. If it is not available, you may
use another power steering fluid as
an emergency replacement.
However, continued use can cause
increased wear and poor steering in
cold weather. Have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
Check the level when the engine is
cold. Look at the side of the
reservoir. The fluid should be
between the UPPER LEVEL and
LOWER LEVEL. If it is below the
LOWER LEVEL, add power steering
fluid to the UPPER LEVEL.
Power Steering
Maintenance
221
LLOOWWEERR LLEEVVEELL
UUPPPPEERR LLEEVVEELL
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
Do not spill the power steering f luid
over the body, auto-tensioner, drive
belt and pulleys.
If spilled accidentally, wipe of f any
f luid completely.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To replace it: Loosen the five bolts.
Clean the air cleaner element by
blowing compressed air through it in
the opposite direction to normal air
flow. If you do not have access to
compressed air (such as a service
station), ask your Acura dealer to do
this service.
The air cleaner element is inside the
air cleaner housing on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment.
The air cleaner element should be
cleaned or replaced according to the
time and distance recommendations
in the maintenance schedule.
Unsnap the clamp, then remove
the intake air duct from the front
of the air cleaner housing.
Use a pair of pliers to slide back
the clamp on the breather tube
attached to the side of the housing.
1.
2.
3.
Air Cleaner Element
Maintenance
Cleaning (Severe Conditions)
Replacement
222
BBOOLLTTSS
BBRREEAATTHHEERR TTUUBBEE
IINNTTAAKKEE AAIIRR DDUUCCTT
AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR
HHOOUUSSIINNGG
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lift up the cover slightly, then
move it sideways to separate it
from the breather tube.
Reinstall the air cleaner housing
cover, tighten the five bolts.
Place the new air cleaner element
in the air cleaner housing.
Remove the old air cleaner
element.
Carefully clean the inside of the
air cleaner housing with a damp
rag.
Push the air cleaner housing cover
into the breather tube.
Install the breather tube clamp.
Install the intake air duct and
clamp.
4. 5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Air Cleaner Element
Maintenance
223
CCOOVVEERR
AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR EELLEEMMEENNTTBBRREEAATTHHEERR TTUUBBEE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Clean the hood latch assembly with a
mild cleaner, then lubricate it with a
multipurpose grease. Lubricate all
the moving parts (as shown),
including the pivot. Follow the time
and distance recommendations in
the Maintenance Schedule. If you
are not sure how to clean and grease
the latch, contact your Acura dealer.
The spark plugs in your car should
be replaced according to the time
and distance recommendations in
the maintenance schedule.
Clean up any dirt and oil that have
collected around the ignition coils.
Remove the four nuts, then
remove the coil cover.
1.
2.
Replacement
Spark PlugsHood Latch
Maintenance
Hood Latch, Spark Plugs
224
LLAATTCCHH
AASSSSEEMMBBLLYY
NNUUTTSS
CCOOIILL
CCOOVVEERR
PPIIVVOOTTSS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Torque the spark plug. (If you do
not have a torque wrench, tighten
the spark plug two-thirds of a turn
after it contacts the cylinder head.)
Tightening torque:
Use a wrench to remove the bolt
holding the ignition coil. Pull the
ignition coil up slightly.
Disconnect the wire connector
from the ignition coil by pushing
on the lock tab and pulling on the
connector. Pull on the plastic
connector, not the wires.
Put the new spark plug into the
socket; then screw it into the hole.
Screw it in by hand so you do not
crossthread it.
Remove the spark plug with
a five-eighths inch (16 mm) spark
plug socket.
Remove the ignition coil.
6.
5.
4.
3.
7.
8.
CONTINUED
Spark Plugs
Maintenance
225
CCOONNNNEECCTTOORR
IIGGNNIITTIIOONN
CCOOIILL
LLOOCCKK TTAABB
13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
−
＋
−
Check the condition of your car’s
battery monthly. You should check
the color of the test indicator window,
and for corrosion on the terminals.
Plug Gap:
Plug Gap:
Insert the ignition coil into the
hole.
Connect the wire connector to the
ignition coil.
Push the ignition coil down all the
way. Install the bolt.
Repeat this procedure for the
other three spark plugs.
Reinstall the coil cover, and
tighten the four nuts.
9.
(RSX and Premium models)
10.
11.
12.
DENSO:
NGK:
NGK:
DENSO:
(Type-S)
BatterySpecifications:
Maintenance
Spark Plugs, Battery
226
0.04 in (1.1 mm)
0.04 in (1.1 mm)
IZFR6K11
SKJ20DR-M11
IFR7G-11K
SK22PR-M11
0
0.1mm
0
0.1mm
Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. A
spark plug that is too loose can
overheat and damage the engine.
Overtightening can cause damage to
the threads in the cylinder head.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If the terminals are severely cor-
roded, clean them with baking soda
and water. Then use a wrench to
loosen and remove the cables from
the terminals. Always disconnect the
negative ( ) cable first and recon-
nect it last. Clean the battery termi-
nals with a terminal cleaning tool or
wire brush. Reconnect and tighten
the cables, then coat the terminals
with grease.
Check the battery terminals for
corrosion (a white or yellowish
powder). To remove it, cover the
terminals with a solution of baking
soda and water. It will bubble up and
turn brown. When this stops, wash it
off with plain water. Dry off the
battery with a cloth or paper towel.
Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
Battery posts,
terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.Check the battery condition by
looking at the test indicator window
on the battery.
The label on the battery explains the
test indicator’s colors.
CONTINUED
Battery
Maintenance
WARNING:
Wash hands after handling.
227
TTEESSTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR WWIINNDDOOWW
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damage to the car’s
electrical system.
Your driver’s power window (see
page ) and your audio system
will also disable itself when the bat-
tery is disconnected or goes dead.
Thenexttimeyouturnontheradio
youwillsee‘‘ ’’inthefrequency
display. Use the Preset buttons to en-
ter the five-digit code (see page ).
92
147
Battery
Maintenance
228
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
Charging the battery with the cables
connected can seriously damage your
car’s electronic controls. Detach the
battery cables bef ore connecting the
battery to a charger.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Look for signs of cracking in the
rubber, or areas that are getting
hard. Replace the blades if you find
these signs, or they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
Disconnect the blade assembly
fromthewiperarmbypushingin
the lock tab. Hold it in while you
push the blade assembly toward
thebaseofthearm.
To replace a blade (front or rear):
Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield or rear window.
2.
1.
CONTINUED
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
229
WWIIPPEERR AARRMMSS
LLOOCCKK TTAABB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal rein-
forcement along the back edge,
remove the metal reinforcement
strips from the old wiper blade and
install them in the slots along the
edge of the new blade.
Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield or rear window.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7.
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
230
RREEIINNFFOORRCCEEMMEENNTT
BBLLAADDEEBBLLAADDEE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Periodically check the engine’s
radiator and air conditioning
condenser for leaves, insects, and
dirt stuck to the front surface. These
block the air flow and reduce cooling
efficiency. Use a light spray from a
hose or a soft brush to remove them.
Run the air conditioning at least once
a week during the cold weather
months. Run it for at least ten
minutes while you are driving at a
steady speed with the engine at
normal operating temperature. This
circulates the lubricating oil con-
tained in the refrigerant.
If the air conditioning does not get as
cold as before, have your dealer
check the system. Recharge the
system with Refrigerant HFC-134a
(R-134a). (See Specifications on page
.)
Your car’s air conditioning is a sealed
system. Any major maintenance,
such as recharging, should be done
by a qualified mechanic. You can do
a couple of things to make sure the
air conditioning works efficiently. 290
CONTINUED
Air Conditioning System
Maintenance
231
AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG CCOONNDDEENNSSEERR
The condenser and radiator f ins bend
easily. Only use a low-pressure spray
or sof t-bristle brush to clean them.
Whenever you have the air conditioning
system serviced, make sure the service
f acility uses a ref rigerant recycling
system. This system captures the
ref rigerant f or reuse. Releasing
ref rigerant into the atmosphere can
damage the environment.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To replace it:
Open the glove box. Remove the
hooks on the side panels by pulling
out on the tabs. Pivot the glove
box out of the way.
The dust and pollen filter is located
behind the glove box.
This filter should be replaced every
30,000 miles (48,000 km) under
normal conditions. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air from industry and
diesel-powered vehicles. Replace it
more often if air flow from the
heating and cooling system becomes
less than usual.
The dust and pollen filter removes
pollen and dust that is brought in
from the outside through the heating
andcoolingsystem.
Remove the dust and pollen filter
cover by pushing up on the lock
tab, then pivoting up the cover.
1.
2.
U.S. : All models
Canada : Premium and Type-S
Optional on RSX
Replacement
Dust and Pollen Filter
Maintenance
232
HHOOOOKKSS
TTAABB
CCOOVVEERR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the first filter by pulling it
straight out of the air conditioning
unit. Remove the second filter by
sliding it to the left, then pulling it
out.
Install the new filters. Reinstall the
cover.
Pivot the glove box up into
position. Reinstall the hooks into
thesidepaneloftheglovebox.
Close the glove box.
If you are not sure how to replace
the dust and pollen filters, have them
replaced by your Acura dealer.
3.
4.
5.
Dust and Pollen Filter
Maintenance
233
DDUUSSTT AANNDD PPOOLLLLEENN FFIILLTTEERRSS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
An auto-tensioner adjusts the tension
of the drive belt. The indicator on
the auto-tensioner should be in the
proper range. It should be checked
accordingtothetimeanddistance
recommendations in the
maintenance schedule.
If the indicator is not within the
proper range, have the drive belt
replaced by your Acura dealer as
soon as possible.
Drive Belts
Maintenance
Drive Belt
234
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
PPrrooppeerr rraannggee
Main Menu
Table of Contents
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure at least once a month. Even
tires that are in good condition may
lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1
to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.
Remember to check the spare tire at
thesametimeyoucheckallthe
other tires.
To safely operate your car, your tires
must be the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread,
and correctly inflated. The following
pages give more detailed information
on how and when to check air
pressure, how to inspect your tires
for damage and wear, and what to do
when your tires need to be replaced.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life and riding
comfort. Underinflated tires wear
unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more
likely to fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your car
ride more harshly, are more prone to
damage from road hazards, and wear
unevenly.
Check the pressure in the tires when
they are cold. This means the car
has been parked for at least three
hours. If you have to drive the car
before checking the tire pressure,
the tires can still be considered
‘‘cold’’ if you drive less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
If you check the pressure when the
tires are hot (the car has been driven
several miles), you will see readings
4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
reading. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the specified cold
pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
CONTINUED
Inflation
Tires
Maintenance
235
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Bumpsorbulgesinthetreador
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions and
speeds. Tire pressures for high
speed driving are the same as for
normal driving.
Thecompactsparetirepressureis:
These pressures are also given on
thetireinformationlabelonthe
driver’s doorjamb.
Tubeless tires have some ability to
self-seal if they are punctured.
However, because leakage is often
very slow, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for
Normal Driving
Front:
Rear:
Inspection
Recommended Tire Pressures for
Normal Driving
Tires
Maintenance
236
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.20 kgf/cm )
P195/65R15 89H
P205/55R16 89V
33 psi (230 kPa ,
2.3 kgf/cm
)
31 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm
)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
The tires were properly balanced by
the factory. They may need to be
rebalanced at some time before they
are worn out. Have your dealer
check the tires if you feel a consis-
tent vibration while driving. A tire
should always be rebalanced if it is
removed from the wheel for repair.
Your car’s tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down to that point, you
will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide
band running across the tread. This
shows there is less than 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. A
tire that is this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see the
tread wear indicator in three or more
places around the tire.
Make sure the installer balances the
wheels when you have new tires
installed. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. Your car’s
original tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’
balanced at the factory. For best
results, have the installer perform a
dynamic balance.
(Only on cars equipped with aluminum
wheels)
Maintenance
Tires
Maintenance
237
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
LLOOCCAATTIIOONN
MMAARRKKSS
TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR
IINNDDIICCAATTOORRSS
Improper wheel weights can damage
your car’s aluminum wheels. Use only
genuine Acura wheel weights f or
balancing.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When shopping for replacement
tires, you may find that some tires
are ‘‘directional.’’ This means they
are designed to rotate only in one
direction. If you use directional tires,
they should be rotated only front-to-
back.
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, you
should have the tires rotated every
10,000 miles (16,000 km). Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
chart each time they are rotated.
Tire Rotation
Tires
Maintenance
238
((FFoorr DDiirreeccttiioonnaall
TTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))
((FFoorr NNoonn--ddiirreeccttiioonnaall
TTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))
FFrroonntt FFrroonntt
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you ever need to replace a wheel,
make sure the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheel
that came on your car. Replacement
wheels are available at your Acura
dealer.
TheABSworksbycomparingthe
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the car. Tire size and
construction can affect wheel speed
and may cause the system to work
inconsistently.
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, then replace the two
front tires or the two rear tires as a
pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your car’s handling.
The tires that came with your car
were selected to match the perform-
ance capabilities of the car while
providing the best combination of
handling, ride comfort, and long life.
Youshouldreplacethemwithradial
tires of the same size, load range,
speed rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall). Mixing radial and
bias-ply tires on your car can reduce
its braking ability, traction, and
steering accuracy.
CONTINUED
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Tires
Maintenance
239
Installing improper tires on your
car can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
Wheels:
See page for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading. Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or
‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have an
all-weather tread design. They
should be suitable for most winter
driving conditions. Tires without
these markings are designed for
optimum traction in dry conditions.
They may not provide adequate
performance in winter driving.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
Tires:
292
(Canada : RSX)
(U.S. : All models
Canada : Premium and Type-S
models)
(Canada : RSX)
(U.S. : All models
Canada : Premium and Type-S
models)
Winter DrivingWheels and Tires
Tires
Maintenance
240
15x6JJ
16x61/2JJ
P205/55R16 89V
P195/65R15 89H
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Mount snow chains on your car
when warranted by driving condi-
tions or required by local laws. Make
sure the chains are the correct size
for your tires. Install them only on
the front tires.
Use only SAE class ‘‘S’’ chains. Only
certain brands of chains will fit your
Acura without coming in contact
with the body or causing mechanical
damage. Before buying any types of
chains, you should consult with your
Acura dealer about the designs and
brands that will work on your Acura.
Also,makesureyoupurchasethe
correct size for your tires.
If you mount snow tires on your
Acura, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tiresonallfourwheelstobalance
your car’s handling in all weather
conditions. Keep in mind the traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may not be as high as your car’s
original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads
areclear.Checkwiththetiredealer
for maximum speed recommen-
dations.
When installing chains, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with chains installed. If
you hear them contacting the body
or chassis, stop and investigate.
Make sure the chains are installed
tightly, and that they are not
contacting the brake lines or
suspension. Remove the chains as
soonasyoustartdrivingoncleared
roads.
Snow Tires Tire Chains
Tires
Maintenance
241
Chains of the wrong size or that are
improperly installed can damage your
car’s brake lines, suspension, body, and
wheels. Stop driving if you hear the
chains hitting any part of the car.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the operation of your car’s
exterior lights at least once a month.
A burned out bulb can create an
unsafe condition by reducing your
car’s visibility and the ability to
signal your intentions to other
drivers.
Lights
Maintenance
242
HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTT LLOOWW BBEEAAMMHHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTT HHIIGGHH
BBEEAAMM
PPAARRKKIINNGG LLIIGGHHTTTTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLIIGGHHTT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the following:
Headlights (low and high beam)
Parking lights
Taillights
Brake lights
High-mount brake light
Turn signals
Back-up lights
Hazard light function
License plate light
Side marker lights
Daytime running lights
(Canadian models)
Ifyoufindanybulbsareburnedout,
replace them as soon as possible.
Refer to the chart on page to
determinewhattypeofreplacement
bulb is needed.
290
Lights
Maintenance
243
TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLIIGGHHTT
SSIIDDEE MMAARRKKEERR LLIIGGHHTT
HHIIGGHH--MMOOUUNNTT
BBRRAAKKEE LLIIGGHHTT
BBAACCKK--UUPP LLIIGGHHTTTTAAIILL//SSTTOOPP LLIIGGHHTT
LLIICCEENNSSEE PPLLAATTEE LLIIGGHHTT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the hood.
Your car has two bulbs on each side,
four in total. Make sure you are
replacing the bulb that is burned out.
Your car uses halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its plastic case and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
(Passenger’s side)
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your car was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area or pull a trailer,
readjustment may be required.
Adjustment of the headlights should
be performed by an Acura technician
or other qualified mechanic.
Remove the power steering
reservoir from the bracket.
1.
2.
Replacing a Headlight BulbHeadlight Aiming
Lights
Maintenance
244
PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGG RREESSEERRVVOOIIRR
PPaasssseennggeerr’’ss ssiiddee
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pulling the
connector straight back.
Remove the rubber weather seal
by pulling on the tab.
Unclip the end of the hold-down
wire from its slot. Pivot it out of
the way and remove the bulb.
Insert the new bulb into the hole,
making sure the tabs are in their
slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
back in place and clip the end into
the slot.
Install the rubber seal over the
back of the headlight assembly.
Make sure it is right side up; it is
marked ‘‘TOP.’’
Push the electrical connector onto
the tabs of the new bulb. Make
sure it locks in place.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
(Passenger’s side)
Install the power steering
reservoir on the bracket.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Lights
Maintenance
245
HHOOLLDD
DDOOWWNN WWIIRREE
BBUULLBB
WWEEAATTHHEERR
SSEEAALL
CCOONNNNEECCTTOORR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
Install the power steering
reservoir on the bracket.
Open the hood.
(Passenger’s side)
Remove the power steering
reservoir from the bracket.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7. (Passenger’s side)
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing a Front Turn Signal
Light Bulb
246
PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGG RREESSEERRVVOOIIRR
PPaasssseennggeerr’’ss ssiiddee
BBUULLBB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the hood. The front parking
light is next to the headlight bulb.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the parking lights and
check that the new bulb is
working.
Open the hatch.
Remove the high-mount brake
light cover by pivoting it toward
the back of the car.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
1.
3.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
Replacing a Front Parking Light
Bulb
247
BBUULLBB
CCOOVVEERR
BBUULLBB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Insert the socket back into the
light assembly. Turn it clockwise
to lock it in place.
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
Reinstall the high-mount brake
light cover.
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver
between the left edge of the lens
and the housing. The lens will
come down.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb in until
it bottoms in the socket.
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
Put the lens back into the light
assembly, right side first. Push on
the left edge until it snaps into
place.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1. 2.
3.
4.
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing a Rear License Plate
Bulb
248
BBUULLBB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Determinewhichofthefivebulbs
is burned out: stop/taillight, turn
signal light, side marker light,
back-up light, or taillight.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
Install the light assembly cover.
Make sure it locks in place.
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
Open the hatch. Remove the light
assembly cover by pulling on the
tabontheoutsideedge.
2.
3.
1.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing Rear Bulbs
249
CCOOVVEERR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Removethelensbycarefully
prying on the edge of the lens with
a fingernail file or a small flat-tip
screwdriver. Do not pry on the
edge of the housing around the
lens.
Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of its metal tabs.
Push the new bulb into the metal
tabs. Snap the lens back in place.
Remove the cargo area light
assembly by carefully prying on
the left edge of the lens with a flat-
tip screwdriver and pulling the
assembly out.
Open the hatch.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing a Ceiling Light Bulb Replacing a Cargo Area Light
Bulb
250
BBUULLBB
BBUULLBB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of the bulb holder.
Push the new bulb into the bulb
holder.
Reinstall the lens by inserting the
outside edge first, then pushing on
theinsideedge.
Remove the lens of the burned out
bulb by carefully prying on the
edge between the lenses with a
fingernail file or a small flat-tipped
screwdriver.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
Slide the right side of the light
assembly into the hole. Push on
theleftsidetolatchtheassembly
into place.
1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
3.
4.
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing the Spotlight Bulbs
251
BBUULLBB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Block the rear wheels.
Fill the fuel tank.
Change the engine oil and filter
(see page ).
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc. are
completely dry.
If you need to park your car for an
extended period (more than one
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your car back on the road. If
possible, store your car indoors.
If the car is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the car is being stored indoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded towel or
ragsotheydonottouchthe
windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and hatch seals. Also, apply a body
wax to the painted surfaces that
mate with the door and hatch seals.
If possible, run the engine for a
while periodically (preferably once
amonth).
If you store your car for 12 months
or longer, have your Acura dealer
perform the inspections called for in
the 24 months/30,000 miles (48,000
km) maintenance schedule (Normal
Conditions) as soon as you take it
out of storage (see page ). The
replacements called for in the
maintenance schedule are not
needed unless the car has actually
reached that time or mileage.
Coverthecarwitha‘‘breathable’’
cover, one made from a porous
material such as cotton.
Nonporous materials, such as
plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Reverse
(manual) or Park (automatic).
209
198
Maintenance
Storing Your Car
252
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Regular cleaning and polishing of
your Acura helps to keep it ‘‘new’’
looking. This section gives you hints
on how to clean your car and
preserve its appearance: the paint,
brightwork, wheels and interior. Also
included are several things you can
do to help prevent corrosion.
.................................Exterior Care . 254
.....................................Washing . 254
.......................................Waxing . 255
....................Aluminum Wheels . 255
..........................Paint Touch-up . 255
..................................Interior Care . 256
...................................Carpeting . 256
.................................Floor Mats . 256
.........................................Fabric . 257
...........................................Vinyl . 257
.......................................Leather . 257
...................................Seat Belts . 257
....................................Windows . 258
..........................Air Fresheners . 258
......................Instrument Panel . 258
....................Corrosion Protection . 259
.................................Body Repairs . 260
Appearance Care
Appearance Care
253
Main Menu
Fill a bucket with cool water. Mix
in a mild detergent, such as
dishwashing liquid or a product
made especially for car washing.
Only use the solvents and cleaners
recommendedinthisOwner’s
Manual.
Frequent washing helps preserve
your car’s beauty. Dirt and grit can
scratch the paint, while tree sap and
bird droppings can permanently ruin
the finish.
Wash your car in a shady area, not in
direct sunlight. If the car is parked in
the sun, move it into the shade and
let the exterior cool down before you
start.
Rinse the car thoroughly with cool
water to remove loose dirt.
As you dry the car, inspect it for
chips and scratches that could allow
corrosion to start. Repair them with
touch-up paint (see page ).
Wash the car using the water and
detergent solution and a soft-
bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.
Start at the top and work your way
down. Rinse frequently.
Check the body for road tar, tree
sap, etc. Remove these stains with
tar remover or turpentine. Rinse it
off immediately so it does not
harm the finish. Remember to re-
wax these areas, even if the rest of
the car does not need waxing.
When you have washed and rinsed
the whole exterior, dry it with a
chamois or soft towel. Letting it
air-dry will cause dulling and water
spots.
255
Exterior Care
Appearance Care
Washing
254
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners
can damage the paint, metal, and
plastic on your car.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
You should use a quality liquid or
paste wax. Apply it according to the
instructions on the container. In
general, there are two types of
products:
Waxes A wax coats the finish and
protects it from damage by exposure
to sunlight, air pollution, etc. You
should use a wax on your Acura
when it is new.
Polishes Polishes and cleaner/
waxes can restore the shine to paint
that has oxidized and lost some of its
shine. They normally contain mild
abrasives and solvents that remove
the top layer of the finish. You
should use a polish on your Acura if
the finish does not have its original
shine after using a wax.
Always wash and dry the whole car
before waxing it. You should wax
your car, including the metal trim,
whenever water sits on the surface
in large patches. It should form into
beads or droplets after waxing.
Cleaning tar, insects, etc. with
removers also takes off the wax.
Remember to re-wax those areas,
even if the rest of the car does not
need waxing.
Your dealer has touch-up paint to
match your car’s color. The color
code is printed on a sticker on the
driver’s doorjamb. Take this code to
your dealer so you are sure to get
the correct color.
Inspect your car frequently for chips
or scratches in the paint. Repair
them right away to prevent corrosion
of the metal underneath. Use the
touch-up paint only on small chips
and scratches. More extensive paint
damage should be repaired by a
professional.
Clean your Acura’s aluminum alloy
wheels as you do the rest of the
exterior.Washthemwiththesame
solution, and rinse them thoroughly.
The wheels have a protective clear-
coat that keeps the aluminum from
corroding and tarnishing. Using
harsh chemicals, including some
commercial wheel cleaners, or stiff
brushes can damage this clear-coat.
Only use a mild detergent and soft
brush or sponge to clean the wheels.
On some models
Exterior Care
Appearance Care
Waxing
Aluminum Wheels
Paint Touch-up
255
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vacuum the carpeting frequently to
remove dirt. Ground-in dirt will make
the carpet wear out faster.
Periodically shampoo the carpet to
keep it looking new. Use one of the
foam-type carpet cleaners on the
market. Follow the instructions that
come with the cleaner, applying it
with a sponge or soft brush. Keep
the carpeting as dry as possible by
not adding water to the foam.
If you remove the floor mat, make
sure to re-anchor it when you put it
back in your car.
If you replace it, use a genuine Acura
floormatthatisdesignedtobeused
with the floor mat anchor in your car.
If you use a non-Acura floor mat in
the driver’s footwell, make sure it
fits properly and that it can be used
with the floor mat anchor.
Do not put additional floor mats on
top of the anchored mat, otherwise
the additional mats may slide
forward and interfere with the pedals.
The genuine Acura driver’s floor mat
that came with your car was
designed to be hooked over the floor
mat anchor. This keeps the floor mat
from sliding forward and possibly
interfering with the pedals.
Carpeting Floor Mats
Appearance Care
Interior Care
256
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your seat belts get dirty, you can
use a soft brush with a mixture of
mild soap and warm water to clean
them. Do not use bleach, dye, or
cleaning solvents. They can weaken
the belt material. Let the belts air-
drybeforeyouusethecar.
Vacuum dirt and dust out of the
material frequently. For general
cleaning, use a solution of mild soap
and lukewarm water, letting it air dry.
To clean off stubborn spots, use a
commercially-available fabric cleaner.
Test it on a hidden area of the fabric
first, to make sure it does not bleach
or stain the fabric. Follow the
instructions that come with the
cleaner.
Remove dirt and dust with a vacuum
cleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a soft
cloth dampened in a solution of mild
soap and water. Use the same
solution with a soft-bristle brush on
more difficult spots. You can also use
commercially-available spray or
foam-type vinyl cleaners.
Vacuum dirt and dust from the
leather frequently. Pay particular
attention to the pleats and seams.
Clean the leather with a soft cloth
dampened with clear water, then
buff it with a clean, dry cloth. If
further cleaning is needed, use a
soap specifically for leather, such as
saddle soap. Apply this soap with a
damp,softcloth.Wipedownand
buff as described above.
On some models
CONTINUED
Seat BeltsFabric
Vinyl
Leather
Interior Care
Appearance Care
257
LLOOOOPP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you use a liquid air freshener,
make sure you fasten it securely so it
does not spill as you drive.
Clean the windows, inside and out,
with a commercially-available glass
cleaner. You can also use a mixture
of one part white vinegar to ten parts
water. This will remove the haze that
builds up on the inside of the
windows. Use a soft cloth or paper
towels to clean all glass and clear
plastic surfaces.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
If you want to use an air freshener/
deodorizer in the interior of your car,
it is best to use a solid type. Some
liquid air fresheners contain chemi-
cals that may cause parts of the
interior trim and fabric to crack or
discolor.
If you want to clean the instrument
panel with a soft towel (wool or
feather), dust from wool and feather
are entered in the lattice pattern of
the instrument panel. Because it is
difficult to clean off dust from the
instrument panel. We recommend to
use a soft bristle brush.
Air FreshenersWindows
Instrument Panel
Interior Care
Appearance Care
258
The rear window def ogger and
antenna wires are bonded to the inside
of the glass. Wiping vigorously up-and-
down can dislodge and break these
wires. When cleaning the rear window,
use gentle pressure and wipe side-to-
side.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Repair chips and scratches in the
paint as soon as you discover them.
Inspect and clean out the drain
holes in the bottom of the doors
and body.
Check the floor coverings for
dampness. Carpeting and floor
mats may remain damp for a long
time, especially in winter. This
dampness can eventually cause
the floor panels to corrode.
Two factors normally contribute to
causing corrosion in your car:
Moisture trapped in body cavities.
Dirtandroadsaltthatcollectsin
hollows on the underside of the
car stays damp, promoting
corrosion in that area.
Removal of paint and protective
coatings from the exterior and
underside of the car.
Many corrosion-preventive measures
are built into your Acura. You can
help keep your car from corroding
by performing some simple periodic
maintenance:
Use a high-pressure spray to clean
the underside of your car. This is
especially important in areas that
useroadsaltinwinter.Itisalsoa
good idea in humid climates and
areas subject to salt air. Cars
equipped with ABS have a sensor
and wiring at each wheel. Be
careful not to damage them.
Have the corrosion-preventive
coatings on the underside of your
car inspected and repaired
periodically.
1.
2.
Corrosion Protection
Appearance Care
259
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure the repair facility uses
genuine Acura replacement body
parts. Some companies make sheet
metal pieces that seem to duplicate
the original Acura body parts, but
are actually inferior in fit, finish, and
corrosion resistance. Once installed,
they do not give the same high-
quality appearance.
Takeyourcartoyourauthorized
Acura dealer for inspection after the
repairs are completed. Your dealer
can make sure that quality materials
were used, and that corrosion-
preventive coatings were applied to
all repaired and replaced parts.
Body repairs can affect your car’s
resistance to corrosion. If your car
needs repairs after a collision, pay
close attention to the parts used in
the repair and the quality of the
work.
When reporting your collision to the
insurance company, tell them you
want genuine Acura parts used in the
repair. Although most insurers
recognize the quality of original
parts, some may try to specify that
the repairs be done with other
available parts. You should investi-
gate this before any repairs have
begun.
Body Repairs
Appearance Care
260
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section covers the more-
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your car towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 262
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 263
..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 268
Nothing Happens or the
Starter Motor Operates
............................Very Slowly . 268
The Starter Operates
................................Normally . 269
................................Jump Starting . 270
............If Your Engine Overheats . 272
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 274
..........Charging System Indicator . 275
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 276
...............Brake System Indicator . 278
..................Closing the Moonroof . 279
..............................................Fuses . 280
..........Checking and Replacing . 281
......................Emergency Towing . 285
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
261
Main Menu
Thecompactsparetirehasashorter
tread life than a regular tire. Replace
it when you can see the tread wear
indicator bars. The replacement
should be the same size and design
tire, mounted on the same wheel.
Thecompactsparetireisnot
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the compact wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Follow these precautions whenever
you are using the compact spare tire:
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
under any circumstances.
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road sur-
faces than the regular tire. Use
greater caution while driving on
this tire.
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare.
Your car has a compact spare tire
that takes up less space. Use this
sparetireasatemporaryreplace-
ment only. Get your regular tire
repaired or replaced and put it back
on your car as soon as you can.
The wheel of the compact spare
tire is designed especially to fit
your car. Do not use your spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
thesamemakeandmodel.
Compact Spare Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
262
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLOOCCAATTIIOONN MMAARRKK
TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR BBAARR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.20 kgf/cm )
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder
of a busy road is dangerous. Drive
slowly along the shoulder until you
gettoanexitoranareatostopthat
is far away from the traffic lanes.
Park the car on firm, level and
non-slippery ground away from
traffic. Put the transmission in
Park (automatic) or Reverse
(manual). Apply the parking brake.
Open the hatch. Pull up the floor
mat and remove the spare tire
cover.
Turn on the hazard warning lights
andturntheignitionswitchto
LOCK (0). Have all the
passengers get out of the car while
you change the tire.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
the trailer.
Unscrew the wing bolt.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
263
JJAACCKK
TTOOOOLL KKIITT
The car can easily roll off the
jack, seriously injuring anyone
underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the car when it
is supported only by the jack.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack.
Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2
turn with the wheel wrench.
Take the spare tire out of its well.
Lift the bass speaker out of the
spare tire and set it aside. Do not
pull on the wiring harness going to
the speaker.
5.
6.
7. 8.Type-S only:
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Changing a Flat Tire
264
JJAACCKK
WWHHEEEELL WWRREENNCCHH
BBAASSSS SSPPEEAAKKEERR
((TTyyppee--SS oonnllyy))
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Use the extension and wheel
wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
Remove the wheel nuts and flat
tire. Temporarily place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface of the wheel facing up.
You could scratch the wheel if you
putitfacedown.
Find the jacking point nearest the
wheel you are removing. Place the
jack under the jacking point. Turn
the end bracket clockwise until
the top of the jack contacts the
jacking point. Make sure the
jacking point tab is resting in the
jack notch.
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully,itmaybehotfrom
driving.
9. 10.
11.
12.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
265
EEXXTTEENNSSIIOONN
WWHHEEEELL WWRREENNCCHH
JJAACCKKIINNGG PPOOIINNTT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Lower the car to the ground and
remove the jack.
13. 14. 15.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Changing a Flat Tire
266
((EExxcceepptt TTyyppee--RR))
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the wheel cover or center
cap.
Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jack’s end bracket clockwise to
raisethejackandlockitinplace.
Screw the adapter into the hole in
the spare tire well. Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
Secure the flat tire with the wing
bolt.
Set the bass speaker inside the
wheel.
18.
19.
16.
17.
20.
21.Type-S only:
All except Type-S:
Type-S only:
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Changing a Flat Tire
267
AADDAAPPTTEERR ((TTyyppee--SS oonnllyy))
SSPPAACCEERR
CCOONNEE
WWIINNGG
BBOOLLTT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When you turn the ignition switch to
START (III), you do not hear the
normal noise of the engine trying to
start. You may hear a clicking sound
or series of clicks, or nothing at all.
Check these things:
Diagnosing why your engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
key to START (III):
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
Store the tool kit.
Store the wheel cover or center
cap in the cargo area. Make sure it
will not get scratched or damaged.
Reinstall the floor mat and spare
tire cover, then close the hatch.
Check the transmission interlock.
If you have a manual transmission,
the clutch pedal must be pushed
all the way to the floor or the
starter will not operate. With an
automatic transmission, it must be
in Park or Neutral.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Turn on the headlights and check
their brightness. If the headlights
are very dim or don’t light at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
22.
23.
24.
270
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
If Your Engine Won’t Start
Jump Starting
Changing a Flat Tire, If Your Engine Won’t Start
268
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn the ignition switch to START
(III). If the headlights do not dim,
check the condition of the fuses. If
thefusesareOK,thereisproba-
bly something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. (See
on page .)
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is dis-
charged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connec-
tions (see page ). You can
then try jump starting the car from
a booster battery (see page ).
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to START (III), but
the engine does not run.
Your car has the Immobilizer
System. You should use a
properly-coded master or valet key
to start the engine (see page ).
A key that is not properly coded
will cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the dash panel to blink
rapidly.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
Do you have fuel? Turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) for a
minute and watch the fuel gauge.
The low fuel level warning light
may not be working, so you were
not reminded to fill the tank.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
280
285
285
226
270
169
75
If Your Engine Won’t Start
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Emergency Towing
The Starter Operates Normally
Starting the
Engine
Emergency
Towing
269
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
＋
If your car’s battery has run down,
you may be able to start the engine
by using a booster battery. Although
this seems like a simple procedure,
you should take several precautions.
You cannot start an Acura with an
automatic transmission by pushing
or pulling it.
To jump start your car, follow these
directions closely:
Open the hood and check the
physical condition of the battery
(see page ). In very cold
weather, check the condition of
the electrolyte. If it seems slushy
or like ice, do not try jump starting
until it thaws.
Turn off all the electrical acces-
sories: heater, A/C, stereo system,
lights, etc.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
Acura’s battery. Connect the other
end to the positive ( ) terminal
on the booster battery.
1.
2.
3.
191
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Jump Starting
270
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
The numbers in the illustration show
you the order to connect the jumper
cables. Make sure to disconnect the
cables in the reverse order.
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Once your car is running, discon-
nectthenegativecablefromyour
car, then from the booster battery.
Disconnect the positive cable from
your car, then the booster battery.
Start your car. If the starter motor
still operates slowly, check the
jumper cable connections to make
sure they have good metal-to-
metal contact.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until all are
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
5.
4.
6.
7.
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
271
BBOOOOSSTTEERR BBAATTTTEERRYY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine.
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading
(climbing a long, steep hill on a
hot day with the A/C running, for
example), the engine should start
to cool down almost immediately.
If it does, wait until the tempera-
ture gauge comes down to the mid-
point then continue driving.
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
Turn off the heating and cooling
system and all other accessories.
Turn on the hazard warning
indicators.
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Wait until you see no more signs
of steam or spray, then open the
hood.
The pointer of your car’s tempera-
ture gauge should stay in the mid-
range under most conditions. It may
go higher if you are driving up a long
steep hill on a very hot day. If it
climbs to the red mark, you should
determine the reason.
Your car can overheat for several
reasons, such as lack of coolant or a
mechanical problem. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
In either case, you should take
immediate action.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If Your Engine Overheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
272
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to your engine.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Start the engine and set the
temperature control lever to
maximum. Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank (see page
). If the level is below the
MIN mark, add coolant to halfway
between the MIN and MAX marks.
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. This
releases any remaining pressure in
the cooling system. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap and turn it until it comes
off.
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine and watch
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair. (See
on page .)
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may also have to
add coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera-
ture gauge, or lower, before check-
ing the radiator.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
11.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
12.
285
160
285
Emergency
Towing
Emergency
Towing
If Your Engine Overheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
273
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator should light when the
ignition switch is ON (II), and go out
after the engine starts. It should
never come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing, it
indicates that the oil pressure
dropped very low for a moment, then
recovered. If the indicator stays on
with the engine running, it shows
that the engine has lost oil pressure
and serious engine damage is
possible. In either case, you should
take immediate action.
Start the engine and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If the light
does not go out within ten seconds,
turn off the engine. There is a
mechanical problem that needs to
be repaired before you can
continue driving. (See
on page .)
Safely pull off the road and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
Letthecarsitforaminute.Open
the hood and check the oil level
(see page ). Although oil level
and oil pressure are not directly
connected, an engine that is very
low on oil can lose pressure during
cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
285
159
207
Emergency
Towing
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
274
LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the car stopped.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator should come on when
the ignition switch is ON (II), and go
out after the engine starts. If it
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, it indicates that the
charging system has stopped
charging the battery.
By eliminating as much of the
electrical load as possible, you can
drive several miles (kilometers)
before the battery is too discharged
to keep the engine running. Drive to
a service station or garage where
you can get technical assistance.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories: radio, heater, A/C, rear
defogger, cruise control, etc. Try not
to use other electrically-operated
controls such as the power windows.
Keep the engine running and take
extra care not to stall it. Starting the
engine will discharge the battery
rapidly.
Charging System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
275
CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you have recently refueled your
car, the cause of this indicator
coming on could be a loose or
missing fuel fill cap. Check the cap
and tighten it until it clicks several
times. Replace the fuel fill cap if it is
missing. Tightening the cap will not
make the indicator turn off
immediately; it takes one driving trip.
If the indicator remains on past one
driving trip, or the fuel cap was not
loose or missing, have the car
checked by the dealer as soon as
possible. Drive moderately until the
dealer has inspected the problem.
Avoid full-throttle acceleration and
driving at high speed.
Youshouldalsohavethedealer
inspect your car if this indicator
comes on repeatedly, even though it
may turn off as you continue driving.
This indicator should light when the
ignition switch is ON (II), and go out
after the engine starts. If it comes on
at any other time, it indicates one of
the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your car’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
your car to put out excessive
emissions. Continued operation may
cause serious damage.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking Care of the Unexpected
276
MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your car’s emissions controls
and engine. Those repairs may not be
covered by your car’s warranties.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your car has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If your car’s battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It takes several
days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
If possible, do not take your car for a
state emissions test until the
readiness codes are set. To check if
they are set, turn the ignition ON (II),
but do not start the engine. The
Malfunction Indicator Lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks 5 times, the readiness
codes are not set. See State
Emissions Testing on pages and
.300
299
Readiness Codes
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking Care of the Unexpected
277
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊＊
＊＊
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the
longer distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the car. You
should have it towed, and repaired as
soon as possible. (See
on page .)
If you must drive the car a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and cautiously.
The Brake System Indicator
normallycomesonwhenyouturn
the ignition switch ON (II). It is a
reminder to check the parking brake.
It comes on and stays lit if you do not
fully release the parking brake.
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. Because of the
brake system’s dual-circuit design, a
problem in one part of the system
will still give you braking at two
wheels. You will feel the brake pedal
go down much farther before the car
begins to slow down, and you will
have to press harder on the pedal.
The distance needed to stop will be
much longer.
If it comes on at any other time, it
indicates a problem with the car’s
brake system. In most cases, the
problem is a low fluid level in the
brake fluid reservoir. Press lightly on
the brake pedal to see if it feels
normal. If it does, check the brake
fluid level the next time you stop at a
service station (see page ). If the
fluid level is low, take the car to your
dealer and have the brake system
inspected for leaks or worn brake
pads.
219
285
Emergency
Towing
Brake System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
278
BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the wrench. Replace the
round plug.
Insert the moonroof wrench into
the socket behind this plug. Turn
the wrench until the moonroof is
fully closed.
Use a screwdriver or coin to
remove the round plug in the
center of the headliner.
If the electric motor will not close
the moonroof, do the following:
Check the fuse for the moonroof
motor (see page ). If the fuse
is blown, replace it with one of the
same or lower rating.
Try closing the moonroof. If the
new fuse blows immediately or the
moonroof motor still does not
operate, you can close the
moonroof manually.
Get the moonroof wrench out of
the tool kit in the cargo area.
5.
6.
4.
1.
2.
3.
281
Closing the Moonroof
Taking Care of the Unexpected
279
RROOUUNNDD PPLLUUGG SSOOCCKKEETT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The under-hood fuse box is located
in the engine compartment next to
the battery. To open it, push the tab
as shown.
All the electrical circuits in your car
have fuses to protect them from a
short circuit or overload. These
fusesarelocatedintwoorthreefuse
boxes.
The interior fuse box is underneath
the dashboard on the driver’s side.
Removethefuseboxbyturningthe
knob and pulling the lid straight out
of its hinges.
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
280
IINNTTEERRIIOORR
UUNNDDEERR--HHOOOODD TTAABB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If something electrical in your car
stops working, the first thing you
should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
and , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that component. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
not the cause. Replace any blown
fuses and check the component’s
operation.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0). Make sure the headlights and
all other accessories are off.
Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking through the top at the wire
inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head screw-
driver.
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each fuse with the fuse
puller provided in the interior fuse
box.
3.
1.
2.
4.
283 284
CONTINUED
Checking and Replacing Fuses
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
281
BBLLOOWWNN
FFUUSSEE PPUULLLLEERR
FFUUSSEE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Look for a burned wire inside the
fuse. If it is burned, replace it with
oneofthesparefusesofthesame
rating or lower.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradioyou
will see ‘‘Code’’ in the frequency
display. Use the Preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code (see page
).
If you cannot drive the car without
fixing the problem, and you do not
have a spare fuse, take a fuse of the
same rating or a lower rating from
one of the other circuits. Make sure
youcandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the cigarette
lighter or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your car.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your car checked
by a qualified mechanic.
5.
6.
147
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Fuses
282
BBLLOOWWNN
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a replace-
ment f use with the proper rating f or the
circuit, install one with a lower rating.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
No.
No.
Circuits Protected
Circuits Protected
:
:
Canadian models only
Type-S only
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25Ignition Coil
Laf Heater
Daytime Running Lights
ACG (IG)
Not Used
Power Window Relay
Moon roof
Radio
Rear Wiper
Gauge panel
ABS
Daytime Running Lights
SRS
Power Mirror
Bass Speaker
Heated Seats
Fuel Pump
Accessory Power Socket
Turn Signal
Front Wiper
Not Used
Front Passenger’s Power Window
Driver’s Power Window
Not Used
Not Used
1
1
2
1
1
2
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
283
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
No. Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21 25
Condenser fan
Small Light
Interior Light
Cooling Fan
Hazard
FI ECU
Horn, Stop
ABS (F/S)
Back Up
ABS Motor
Rear Demister
Heater Mortor
Power Window
Option
Left Headlight
Door Lock
Right Headlight
Not Used
Main Fuse Battery
Main Fuse Ignition
Spare Fuse
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Fuses
284
UNDER HOOD FUSE BOX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front or rear) and lift
them off the ground. The other two
tires remain on the ground.
If your Acura cannot be transported
by flat-bed, it should be towed by
wheel-lift equipment with the front
wheels off the ground. If, due to
damage, your car must be towed
with the front wheels on the ground,
do the following.
Release the parking brake.
Shift the transmission to Neutral.
With the front wheels on the ground,
it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speedbelow35mph(55km/h).
There are three popular types of
professional towing equipment.
If your car needs to be towed, call a
professional towing service or, if you
belong to one, an organization that
provides roadside assistance. Never
tow your car behind another vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
The operator
loads your car on the back of a truck.
The tow
truck uses metal cables with hooks
on the ends. These hooks go around
parts of the frame or suspension and
the cables lift that end of the car off
the ground. Your car’s suspension
and body can be seriously damaged.
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.
ShifttoD,thentoN.
Turn off the engine.
Automatic Transmission
Manual Transmission:
CONTINUED
Wheel-lift Equipment
Flat-bed Equipment
Sling-type Equipment
This is
an acceptable way to tow your
Acura.
This is the best way to transport
your Acura.
This method of towing is
unacceptable.
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
285
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine (automatic transmission), your
car must be transported with the f ront
wheels of f the ground.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you decide to tow your car with all
four wheels on the ground, make
sure you use a properly-designed and
attached tow bar. Prepare the car for
towing as described above, and leave
the ignition switch in Accessory (I)
so the steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure the radio and any
electrical accessories are turned off
so they do not run down the battery.
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
286
Trying to lif t or tow your car by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the car’s weight.
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in Accessory (I), and
make sure the steering wheel turns
f reely bef ore you begin towing.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your Acura, and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 288
................................Specifications . 290
DOT Tire Quality Grading
.............................(U.S.Cars) .292
.................................Treadwear . 292
...........Traction AA, A, B, C . 292
...........Temperature A,B,C .293
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 294
......Driving in Foreign Countries . 295
.......................Emissions Controls . 296
.....................The Clean Air Act . 296
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 296
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 296
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 297
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 297
....................PGM-FI System . 297
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 297
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 297
....................Replacement Parts . 297
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 298
..............State Emissions Testing . 299
Technical Information
Technical Information
287
Main Menu
Your car has several identifying
numbers located in various places.
The Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
Acura dealer uses to register your
car for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your car. The easiest place to find
the VIN is on a plate fastened to the
top of the dashboard. You can see it
by looking through the windshield
on the driver’s side. It is also on the
Certification label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb, and is stamped on
the engine compartment bulkhead.
The VIN is also provided in bar code
on the Certification label.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
288
VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR
CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN LLAABBEELL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Engine Number is stamped into
the engine block.
The Transmission Number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
289
AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR
MMAANNUUAALL TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERREENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Technical Information
Specifications
290
Air ConditioningDimensions
Weights
Engine
Capacities
173.0 in (4,395 mm)
67.9 in (1,725 mm)
55.1 in (1,400 mm)
HFC-134a (R-134a)
17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)
SP-10
13.2 US gal (50
, 11.0 Imp gal)
1.35 US gal (5.1 , 1.12 Imp gal)
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
101.2 in (2,570 mm)
58.3 in (1,482 mm)
58.3 in (1,481 mm)
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
Water cooled 4-stroke
DOHC VTEC in line,
4-cylinder gasoline engine.
3.19 x 3.50 in (86.0 x 86.0)
121.9 cu-in (1,998 cm
)
9.8 : 1
11.0 : 1
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
1.32 US gal (5.0
, 1.10 Imp gal)
1.69 US gal (6.4 , 1.41 Imp gal)
1.66 US gal (6.3
, 1.39 Imp gal)
4.4 US qt (4.2 , 3.7 Imp qt)
5.0 US qt (4.7
, 4.1 Imp qt)
4.4 US qt (4.2
, 3.7 Imp qt)
5.0 US qt (4.7
, 4.1 Imp qt)
5.6 US qt (5.3
, 4.7 Imp qt)
6.1 US qt (5.8
, 5.1 Imp qt)
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine.
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6
, 0.13 Imp gal)
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
See spark plug maintenance sec-
tion page 224 .
Approx.
1:
2:
3:
4:
Front
Rear
Change
Manual
Automatic
Total
Manual
Automatic
Change
Including filter
Without filter
Total
RSX and Premium models
Type-S
1:
2:
RSX and Premium models
Type-S
1
2
1
4
2
3
2
3
2
3
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊＊＊
＊＊＊
＊
Specifications
Technical Information
291
FusesCapacities
Lights
Battery
Alignment
Tires
0.0in(0mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°00’
Interior
Under-hood
1.8 US qt (1.7
, 1.5 Imp qt)
1.6 US qt (1.5
, 1.3 Imp qt)
2.9 US qt (2.7
, 2.4 Imp qt)
6.9 US qt (6.5
, 5.7 Imp qt)
2.6 US qt (2.5
, 2.2 Imp qt)
4.8 US qt (4.5
, 4.0 Imp qt)
Manual
transmission
fluid
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
55 W
55 W
21 W
21 W
21 W/5 W
21 W
5W
21 W
5W
8W
5W
8W
See page 283 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door under the dashboard.
See page 284 or the fuse box
cover.
12 V 5 W (Amber)
Headlights
Front turn signal
Front position lights
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/Taillights
High-mount brake light
Rear side marker lights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
Ceiling light
Cargo area light
Spotlights
Glove Box light
Capacity 12 V 36 AH/5 HR
3.4 W12 V
0°45’
1°30’
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
Size
Pressure
P205/55R16 89V
T135/70D15 99M
T125/70D16 96M
P195/65R15 89H
33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm
)
31 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.20 kgf/cm
)
Change
Total
Change
Total
U.S. cars
Canadian cars
Front/Rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Spare
High
Low
1:
2:
3:
4:
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Canadian RSX
U.S. RSX
Canadian Premium
Type-S
Automatic trans-
mission fluid
Windshield
washer reservoir
1
2, 3, 4
1, 2, 3
4
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
The tires on your car meet all U.S.
Federal Safety Requirements. All
tires are also graded for treadwear,
traction, and temperature perform-
ance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards.
The following explains these
gradings.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
Technical Information
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)
Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
DOT Quality Grades
292
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not over-
loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Technical Information
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)
Temperature A,B,C
293
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Some conventional gasolines are
being blended with alcohol or an
ether compound. These gasolines
are collectively referred to as
oxygenated fuels. To meet clean air
standards, some areas of the United
States and Canada use oxygenated
fuels to help reduce emissions.
If you use an oxygenated fuel, be
sure it is unleaded and meets the
minimum octane rating requirement.
Before using an oxygenated fuel, try
to confirm the fuel’s contents. Some
states/provinces require this
informationtobepostedonthe
pump.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
Fuel system damage or performance
problems resulting from the use of
an oxygenated fuel containing more
than the percentages of oxygenates
given above are not covered under
warranty.
(methyl or wood
alcohol)
Your vehicle was not designed to use
fuel that contains methanol.
Methanol can corrode metal parts in
the fuel system, and also damage
plastic and rubber components. This
damage would not be covered by
your warranties.
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 15 percent MTBE by volume.
(ethyl or grain alcohol)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 10 percent ethanol by volume.
Gasoline containing ethanol may be
marketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’
The following are the U.S. EPA and
Canadian CGSB approved
percentages of oxygenates:
Technical Information
Oxygenated Fuels
METHANOL
MTBE
ETHANOL
294
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you are planning to take your
Acura outside the U.S. or Canada,
contact the tourist bureaus in the
areas you will be traveling in to find
out about the availability of unleaded
gasoline with the proper octane
rating.
If unleaded gasoline is not available,
be aware that using leaded gasoline
in your Acura will affect perfor-
mance and fuel mileage, and damage
its emissions controls. It will no
longer comply with U.S. and
Canadian emissions regulations, and
will be illegal to operate in North
America. To bring your car back into
compliance will require the replace-
ment of several components, such as
theoxygensensorsandthethree
way catalytic converter. These re-
placements are not covered under
warranty.
Technical Information
Driving in Foreign Countries
295
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on page
.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
In Canada, Acura vehicles comply
with the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (CMVSS) for
Emissions valid at the time they are
manufactured.
The burning of gasoline in your car’s
engine produces several byproducts.
Some of these are carbon monoxide
(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and
hydrocarbons (HC). Gasoline
evaporating from the tank also
produces hydrocarbons. Controlling
the production of NOx, CO, and HC
is important to the environment.
Under certain conditions of sunlight
and climate, NOx and HC react to
form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbon
monoxide does not contribute to
smog creation, but it is a poisonous
gas.
Your car has a Positive Crankcase
Ventilation System. This keeps
gasses that build up in the engine’s
crankcase from going into the
atmosphere. The Positive Crankcase
Ventilation valve routes them from
the crankcase back to the intake
manifold. They are then drawn into
the engine and burned.196
The Clean Air Act
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Technical Information
Emissions Controls
296
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Genuine Acura replacement parts or
their equivalent for repairs. Using
lower quality parts may increase the
emissions from your car.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your car. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.
The Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
The exhaust emissions controls
include three systems: PGM-FI,
Ignition Timing Control and Three
Way Catalytic Converter. These
three systems work together to
control the engine’s combustion and
minimize the amount of HC, CO, and
NOx that comes out the tailpipe. The
exhaust emissions control systems
are separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The PGM-FI System uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: Air Intake,
Engine Control, and Fuel Control.
The Engine Control Module (ECM)
or the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) uses various sensors to
determine how much air is going
into the engine. It then controls how
much fuel to inject under all operat-
ing conditions.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO and NOx produced.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
2
2
Replacement PartsOnboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Exhaust Emissions Controls
PGM-FI System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Ignition Timing Control System
Technical Information
Emissions Controls
297
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keep the engine tuned-up.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Acura part
or its equivalent.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any com-
bustible materials that come near it.
Park your car away from high grass,
dry leaves, or other flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your car’s three way catalytic
converter.
Have your car diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Technical Information
Three Way Catalytic Converter
298
TTHHRREEEE WWAAYY CCAATTAALLYYTTIICC CCOONNVVEERRTTEERR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle re-tested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for re-testing
by doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 8
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 20° and
95°F.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park
(automatic transmission) or
Neutral (manual transmission).
Increase the engine speed to 2,000
rpm and hold it there until the
temperature gauge rises to at least
1/4ofthescale(approximately3
minutes).
State Emissions Testing
Technical Information
Testing of Readiness Codes
299
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your Acura dealer.
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80to97km/h)foratleast20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not use
thecruisecontrol.Whentraffic
allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
Technical Information
State Emissions Testing
300
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Customer Relations
................................Information . 302
....................Warranty Coverages . 303
Reporting Safety Defects
..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 304
.....................Authorized Manuals . 306
Warranty and Customer Relations
Warranty and Customer Relations
301
Main Menu
Acura dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
Service Manager or General
Manager can help. Almost all
problems are solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact the Acura
Customer Relations Office.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Relations Office.
U.S. Owners:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your car
Date of purchase
Mileage on your car
Your name, address, and tele-
phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
car to you
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Canadian Owners:
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Vortex Motor Corp.
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
(787) 250-4327
288
Customer Relations Information
Warranty and Customer Relations
302
Acura Client Services
Department
1919 Torrance Blvd
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
or telephone: (800) 382-2238
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−−
−
−
−
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered for the useful life of the
vehicle.
Your new Acura is covered by these
warranties:
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from an Acura dealer.
covers all genuine
Honda replacement parts against
defects in materials and workman-
ship.
genuine Acura Accessories are
covered under this warranty. Time
and mileage limits depend on the
type of accessory and other factors.
Please read your warranty manual
for details.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the car.
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s emis-
sions control systems. Time, mileage,
and coverage are conditional. Please
read the warranty manual for exact
information.
this warranty gives up
to 100 percent credit toward a
replacement battery.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2002 Acura Warranty Information
booklet that came with your car for
precise information on warranty
coverages. Your Acura’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2002 Warranty
Manual that came with your car.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
Warranty Coverages
Warranty and Customer Relations
303
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To contact NHTSA, you may either
call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
Washington D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying Acura Automobile
Division, American Honda Motor Co.,
Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Acura
Automobile Division, American
Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
Warranty and Customer Relations
304
Main Menu
Table of Contents
305
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
２
０
０
２
Ａ
Ｃ
Ｕ
Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners should
contact their authorized Acura dealer.
The following publications covering the operation and
servicing of your vehicle can be obtained from Helm
Incorporated, either by filling out the attached form or,
for credit card holders, calling the toll-free phone number
on the form. For manuals prior to the year shown below,
contact Helm Incorporated, P.O. Box 07280, Detroit,
Michigan 48207, or call 1-800-782-4356.
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
Authorized Manuals
306
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
OR
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
Publication
Form Number
61S6M00
61S6M00EL
61S6M30
31S6M600
ACU-R
Price
Each
$67.00
$47.00
$42.00
$35.00
FREE
Form Description
2002 Acura RSX
Service Manual
2002 Acura RSX
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2002 Acura RSX
Body Repair Manual
2002 Acura RSX
Owner’s Manual
Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
PUBLICATION NUMBER
VEHICLE MODEL
Name Year
Qty
Price
Each
Total
Price
GRAND TOTAL
HANDLING CHARGE
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
TOTAL MATERIAL
$6.00
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Ｓ
Ｈ
Ｉ
Ｐ
Ｔ
Ｏ
Ｐ
Ａ
Ｙ
Ｍ
Ｅ
Ｎ
Ｔ
This manual complements the Service Manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
stand.
Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
Authorized Manuals
307
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
Customer Name
Attention
Apartment Number
State & Zip Code
City
Daytime Telephone Number
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
Street Address No P.O. Box Number
()
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
...Accessories and Modifications . 162
................................Accessories . 162
...Additional Safety Precaution . 163
............................Modifications . 163
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.......................................Position) . 78
...............Accessory Power Socket . 99
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 209
.............................Airbag (SRS) . 10, 48
.....................Air Cleaner Element . 222
..............Air Conditioning System . 102
..............................Maintenance . 231
.........................................Usage . 102
.......................Air Outlets (Vents) . 102
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 235
.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 294
......................................Antifreeze . 212
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
...............................Indicator . 61, 183
...................................Operation . 182
Anti-theft Steering Column
..............................................Lock . 78
..........................Appearance Care . 253
................................Audio System . 109
.............Automatic Speed Control . 149
..............Automatic Transmission . 173
..........................Capacity,Fluid .290
...............Checking Fluid Level . 217
.......................................Shifting . 173
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 173
................Shift Lever Positions . 173
....................Shift Lock Release . 179
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 61, 275
............................Jump Starting . 269
..............................Maintenance . 226
............................Specifications . 291
..............................Before Driving . 153
....................................Belts,Seat .8,44
.............................Beverage Holder . 97
...................................Body Repair . 260
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 182
.............Break-in, New Linings . 155
....................Bulb Replacement . 249
...........................................Fluid . 219
.........................................Parking . 95
.................System Indicator . 60, 278
........................Wear Indicators . 181
.............................Braking System . 181
........................Break-in, New Car . 155
..Brightness Control, Instruments . 70
........................Brights, Headlights . 69
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 249
..............................Brake Lights . 249
......................Cargo Area Light . 250
..............................Ceiling Light . 250
................Front Parking Lights . 247
.........Front Turn Signal Lights . 246
.................................Headlights . 244
.........High-mount Brake Light . 247
...................License Plate Light . 248
.........Rear Side Marker Lights . 249
............................Specifications . 291
...................................Spotlights . 251
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 244
Index
A
B
I
Main Menu
＊
................DANGER, Explanation of . ii
...................................Dashboard . 2, 58
................Daytime Running Lights . 69
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 304
........................Defog and Defrost . 105
................Defogger, Rear Window . 72
....................................Dimensions . 290
...............Dimming the Headlights . 69
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 217
..................................Engine Oil . 159
..........................Directional Signals . 70
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 181
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 211
Doors
..............Locking and Unlocking . 79
......................Power Door Locks . 80
...................Capacities Chart . 290, 291
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54
...........................Cargo Area Cover . 89
.............................Carrying Cargo . 164
Cassette Player
............................................Care . 137
...................................Operation . 133
..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii
...................................CD Changer . 139
............................................Care . 145
...................................Operation . 141
........................Certification Label . 288
............................................Chains . 241
Changing Oil
........................................How to . 209
......................................When to . 196
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 263
............Changing Engine Coolant . 214
...Charging System Indicator . 61, 275
............Checklist, Before Driving . 168
.....................................Child Safety . 21
.......................................Child Seats . 26
.........................................LATCH . 42
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 41
....................Cleaner Element, Air . 222
Cleaning
....................Aluminum Wheels . 255
...................................Carpeting . 256
......................................Exterior . 254
.........................................Fabric . 258
......................Instrument Panel . 258
.......................................Interior . 256
.......................................Leather . 257
...................................Seat Belts . 257
...........................................Vinyl . 257
....................................Windows . 258
.........................Clock, Setting the . 114
...................................Clutch Fluid . 219
.....................Code, Audio System . 147
........................CO in the Exhaust . 296
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 169
..............................Compact Spare . 262
...................Console Compartment . 98
...............Consumer Information . 302
.............Controls, Instruments and . 57
Coolant
........................................Adding . 212
....................................Checking . 160
.........................Proper Solution . 212
...................................Replacing . 214
...................Temperature Gauge . 67
....................Corrosion Protection . 259
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 296
............Cruise Control Operation . 149
..........Customer Relations Office . 302
Index
C
D
II
Main Menu
CONTINUED
..............................Economy, Fuel . 161
............Emergencies on the Road . 261
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 270
...........Brake System Indicator . 278
................Changing a Flat Tire . 263
.....Charging System Indicator . 275
..................Checking the Fuses . 281
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 274
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 276
...Manually Closing Moonroof . 279
..................Overheated Engine . 272
...........................Emergency Brake . 95
......................Emergency Flashers . 73
......................Emergency Towing . 285
.......................Emissions Controls . 296
.............Emissions Testing, State . 299
Engine
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 67
.................................Drive Belts . 234
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 61, 276
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 61, 274
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 207
...............................Overheating . 272
............................Specifications . 290
.......................................Starting . 169
......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 294
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 296
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 54
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 25
..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 254
............................Fabric, Cleaning . 257
...................................Fan, Interior . 102
Features, Comfort and
..............................Convenience . 101
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 156
Filters
................................Air Cleaner . 222
...............................................Oil . 209
Manual Transmission
...............Checking Fluid Level . 219
................................Shifting the . 170
.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 73
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 263
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 217
..........................................Brake . 219
.........................................Clutch . 220
..............Manual Transmission . 219
..........................Power Steering . 221
..................Windshield Washer . 216
FM Stereo Radio
...................................Reception . 126
...........................Folding Rear Seat . 87
.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 295
..........................Four-way Flashers . 73
..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 292
Downshifting, 5-speed and 6-speed
..............Manual Transmission . 170
.....................................Drive Belts . 234
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
...........................................Driving . 167
....................................Economy . 161
.........................In Bad Weather . 184
................In Foreign Countries . 295
Index
E
F
III
Main Menu
.................................................Fuel . 155
......................Fill Door and Cap . 156
...........................................Gauge . 67
................Octane Requirement . 155
...............................Oxygenated . 294
........................Reserve Indicator . 62
........................Tank, Filling the . 156
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 280
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 161
..........................................Gasohol . 294
.........................................Gasoline . 155
...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 62
...........................................Gauge . 66
................Octane Requirement . 155
........................Tank, Filling the . 156
................Gas Station Procedures . 156
Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 67
...............................................Fuel . 67
...............................Speedometer . 66
.................................Tachometer . 66
Gearshift Lever Positions
..........Automatic Transmission . 173
5-speed and 6-speed Manual
.........................Transmission . 170
..............................Glass Cleaning . 258
........................................Glove Box . 84
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 288
Ignition
..............................................Keys . 75
...........................................Switch . 77
............Timing Control System . 297
........................Immobilizer System . 76
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
Indicators, Instrument
.............................................Panel . 59
...............................Infant Restraint . 21
......................................Infant Seats . 30
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 41
.........................................LATCH . 42
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 235
...................................Inside Mirror . 94
.............................Inspection, Tire . 236
........................Instrument Panel . 2, 58
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 70
...........................Interior Cleaning . 256
.................................Interior Lights . 99
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 244
................................................Hatch . 80
.................................Opening the . 80
...................Open Monitor Light . 62
..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 73
Headlights
........................................Aiming . 244
............Daytime Running Lights . 69
..................High Beam Indicator . 62
.........................Reminder Chime . 69
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 244
...................................Turning on . 69
..............................Head Restraints . 11
.....................Heating and Cooling . 102
.............High Altitude, Starting at . 169
.................High-Low Beam Switch . 69
..............High-mount Brake Light . 247
....................................Hood Latch . 224
.......................Hood, Opening the . 157
..................................................Horn . 68
...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 220
.................................Hydroplaning . 185
Index
G
H
I
IV
Main Menu
CONTINUED
........................................Introduction . i
........................Jacking up the Car . 265
.......................................Jack, Tire . 264
................................Jump Starting . 270
..................................................Keys . 75
.......................Label, Certification . 288
.................Lane Change, Signaling . 70
..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 16, 44
.........................Leather, Cleaning . 257
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 244
.......................................Indicator . 59
.........................................Parking . 69
..................................Turn Signal . 70
.....................................Load Limit . 165
......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 78
Locks
.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 78
............................Fuel Fill Door . 156
....................................Glove Box . 84
............................................Hatch . 80
..............Power Door and Hatch . 80
........................Low Coolant Level . 160
...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 170
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 60
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 61, 274
Lubricant Specifications
..................................Chart . 290, 291
.........................................Luggage . 164
..................................Maintenance . 193
...Owner Maintenance Checks . 205
........................................Record . 203
......................Required Indicator . 64
.............................Schedule . 198-202
.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 61, 276
...................Manual Transmission . 170
........Manual Transmission Fluid . 219
...............................Meters, Gauges . 66
...................Methanol in Gasoline . 294
..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 94
.........................................Moonroof . 93
......................Closing Manually . 279
.....................................Operation . 93
...................Neutral Gear Position . 174
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 155
.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 171
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 288
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 155
.........................................Odometer . 66
...............................Odometer, Trip . 66
Index
J
K
L
M
N
O
V
Main Menu
Oil
........................Change, How to . 209
......................Change, When to . 198
......................Checking Engine . 159
..............Pressure Indicator . 61, 274
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 208
...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 78
Onboard Refueling Vapor
....................................Recovery . 297
..Operation in Foreign Countries . 287
..............................Outside Mirrors . 94
....................Overheating, Engine . 272
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 294
.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 205
..............................Paint Touch-up . 255
..............Panel Brightness Control . 70
........................Park Gear Position . 174
...........................................Parking . 180
.................................Parking Brake . 95
........................Parking Lights . 69, 247
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 180
.............................PGM-FI System . 297
..................Polishing and Waxing . 255
............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19
............................Protecting Adults . 13
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19
........................Protecting Children . 21
.......................Protecting Infants . 30
.......Protecting Larger Children . 37
.........Protecting Small Children . 34
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 41
.............................Using LATCH . 42
...................Radiator Overheating . 272
.............Radio/CD Sound System . 125
...........................Readiness Codes . 299
..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 249
............................Rear Seat Access . 86
..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 87
............................Rear View Mirror . 94
.................Rear Window Defogger . 73
....................Rear Window Washer . 72
.......................Rear Window Wiper . 72
...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 85
.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 171
.............................Reminder Lights . 59
Replacement Information
.................Air Cleaner Element . 222
.......................................Coolant . 214
................Engine Oil and Filter . 209
..........................................Fuses . 280
................................Light Bulbs . 244
....................................Schedule . 198
................................Spark Plugs . 224
...........................................Tires . 235
.............................Wiper Blades . 229
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 46
...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 212
...............................Restraint, Child . 21
..................Reverse Gear Position . 174
................................Rotation, Tire . 238
..................................Safety Belts . 8, 48
.................................Safety Features . 7
.........................................Airbags . 10
..................................Door Locks . 11
Index
P
R
S
VI
Main Menu
＊
CONTINUED
..........................Head Restraints . 11
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 55
...............................Safety Messages . ii
.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 44
...............Additional Information . 44
.....................................Cleaning . 257
................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 16, 44
................................Maintenance . 46
Reminder Light and
................................Beeper . 44, 60
...................System Components . 44
...............Use During Pregnancy . 19
...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 16
....................................Seat Heaters . 88
..................Seats, Adjusting the . 13, 85
............................Security System . 148
...............................Serial Number . 288
...........................Service Intervals . 198
...........................Service Manual . 306
.........Service Station Procedures . 156
..........................Setting the Clock . 130
.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 173
........................Shift Lock Release . 179
Shifting
.The Automatic Transmission . 173
The 5-speed and 6-speed Manual
.........................Transmission . 170
...............................Signaling Turns . 70
.....................................Snow Tires . 241
...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 254
................................Sound System . 109
Spare Tire
......................................Inflating . 262
............................Specifications . 289
................Spark Plugs, Replacing . 224
....................Specifications Charts . 290
..................................Speed Control . 74
...................................Speedometer . 66
.......................................Spotlights . 100
..........SRS, Additional Information . 48
...Additional Safety Precautions . 53
...........How Your Airbags Work . 48
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 50
How the SRS Indicator Light
.......................................Works . 52
........................SRS Components . 48
..................................SRS Service . 51
.............................SRS Indicator . 51, 60
..............State Emissions Testing . 299
....START (Ignition Key Position) . 78
.......................Starting the Engine . 169
In Cold Weather at High
..................................Altitude . 169
................With a Dead Battery . 270
........Steam Coming from Engine . 272
Steering Wheel
..................................Adjustment . 74
.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 78
...................Stereo Sound System . 125
...........................Storing Your Car . 252
Supplemental Restraint
................................System . 10, 48
......................................Servicing . 51
.........................SRS Indicator . 51, 60
..................................Synthetic Oil . 209
.....................................Tachometer . 66
......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 249
Taking Care of the
...............................Unexpected . 261
....................................Tape Player . 133
Index
T
VII
Main Menu
＊
................Technical Descriptions . 287
.....Emissions Control Systems . 296
.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 294
Three Way Catalytic
...............................Converter . 298
.......................Temperature Gauge . 67
..............Tether Anchorage Points . 41
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 298
..........................Time, Setting the . 130
....................................Tire Chains . 241
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 263
...............................................Tires . 235
..............................Air Pressure . 235
.........................Checking Wear . 236
..........................Compact Spare . 262
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 292
......................................Inflation . 235
..................................Inspection . 236
..............................Maintenance . 237
...................................Replacing . 239
......................................Rotating . 238
...........................................Snow . 241
............................Specifications . 290
................................Tire Chains . 241
..........................Winter Driving . 240
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 263
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 186
................................Emergency . 285
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
..............................Automatic . 217
Checking Fluid Level,
...................................Manual . 219
..................Fluid Selection . 218, 219
..............Identification Number . 288
.............Shifting the Automatic . 173
..................Shifting the Manual . 170
.....................................Treadwear . 292
.......................................Trip Meter . 67
....................................Turn Signals . 70
.....................Underside, Cleaning . 259
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 261
....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 292
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 155
.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 256
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 211
..................................Vanity Mirror . 96
.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 165
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 290
....Vehicle Identification Number . 288
.............................Vehicle Storage . 252
.....................................Ventilation . 103
.................................................VIN . 287
...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 257
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 208
.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 55
..................Warranty Coverages . 303
Washer, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 216
.....................................Operation . 72
.........................................Washing . 254
..................Waxing and Polishing . 255
Wheels
...............Adjusting the Steering . 74
............Alignment and Balance . 237
......Cleaning Aluminum Alloys . 255
Index
U
V
W
VIII
Main Menu
..........................Compact Spare . 262
......................................Wrench . 264
Windows
.....................................Cleaning . 258
..................Operating the Power . 90
...........................Rear, Defogger . 73
Windshield
.......................................Cleaning . 72
...................................Defroster . 102
.......................................Washers . 72
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 229
.....................................Operation . 72
....................................Worn Tires . 236
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 285
: U.S. and Canada only
Index
IX
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil: Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Brake Fluid:
Power Steering Fluid:
Manual Transmission Fluid:
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 86 or higher.
Premium unleaded gasoline,
pump octane number of 91 or
higher.
13.2 US gal (50
, 11.0 Imp gal)
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
aDEXRON
III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see page
).
Front:
33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm
)
Rear:
31 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
API Service SJ ‘‘Energy
Conserving’’ oil, SAE 5W-20
(except Type-S) 5W-30 (Type-S)
viscosity (see page ).
5.0 US qt (4.7
, 4.1 Imp qt)
4.4 US qt (4.2
, 3.7 Imp qt)
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
Honda Manual Transmission
Fluid preferred, or an API service
SG, SH or SJ, SAE 10W-30 or
10W-40 motor oil as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
Capacity (including differential):
1.6 US qt (1.5
, 1.3 Imp qt)
217
(All except Type S)
(Type S)
221
219
(All except Type-S)
(Type-S)
207
219
Main Menu
